HP Compaq dc7100 DT Technical Reference

Technical Reference Guide

HP Compaq dc71xx and dx61xx Series

Business Desktop Computers

Document Part Number: 361834-002

January 2005

This document provides information on the design, architecture, function, and capabilities of the HP Compaq dc71xx and dx61xx Series Business

Desktop Computers. This information may be used by engineers, technicians, administrators, or anyone needing detailed information on the products covered.

© Copyright 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.

Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

Intel, Pentium, Intel Inside, and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

Adobe, Acrobat, and Acrobat Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard

Company.

Å WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.

Ä CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information.

Technical Reference Guide

HP Compaq dc71xx and dx61xx Series Business Desktop Computers

Second Edition (January 2005)

First Edition (April 2004)

Document Part Number: 361834-002

Contents

1 Introduction

1.1 About this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1.1 Online Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1.2 Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.2 Additional Information Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.3 Model Numbering Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

1.4 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

1.5 Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

1.5.1 Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

1.5.2 Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

1.5.3 Register Notation and Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

1.5.4 Bit Notation and Byte Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

1.6 Common Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

2 System Overview

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

2.2 Features And Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

2.2.1 Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

2.2.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

2.3 Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

2.3.1 Cabinet Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

2.3.2 Chassis Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

2.3.3 Board Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

2.4 System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15

2.4.1 Intel Pentium 4 Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

2.4.2 Chipset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18

2.4.3 Support Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19

2.4.4 System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19

2.4.5 Mass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19

2.4.6 Serial and Parallel Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

2.4.7 Universal Serial Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

2.4.8 Network Interface Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

2.4.9 Graphics Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21

2.4.10Audio Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21

2.5 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22

3 Processor/Memory Subsystem

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

3.2 Pentium 4 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

3.2.1 Processor Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 iii

Contents

3.2.2 Processor Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

3.3 Memory Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

3.4 Subsystem Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9

4 System Support

4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

4.2 PCI Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

4.2.1 PCI Bus Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

4.2.2 PCI Bus Master Arbitration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

4.2.3 Option ROM Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

4.2.4 PCI Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

4.2.5 PCI Power Management Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9

4.2.6 PCI Sub-Busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9

4.2.7 PCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9

4.3 AGP Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

4.3.1 Bus Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

4.3.2 AGP Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14

4.4 System Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15

4.4.1 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15

4.4.2 Direct Memory Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

4.5 System Clock Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23

4.6 Real-Time Clock and Configuration Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23

4.6.1 Clearing CMOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24

4.6.2 CMOS Archive and Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24

4.6.3 Standard CMOS Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25

4.7 System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25

4.7.1 Security Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26

4.7.2 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27

4.7.3 System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28

4.7.4 Thermal Sensing and Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29

4.8 Register Map and Miscellaneous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30

4.8.1 System I/O Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31

4.8.2 LPC47B397 I/O Controller Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32

5 Input/Output Interfaces

5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

5.2 Enhanced IDE/SATA Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

5.2.1 EIDE Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

5.3 Diskette Drive Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

5.3.1 Diskette Drive Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

5.3.2 Diskette Drive Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

5.4 Serial Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12

5.4.1 Serial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12

5.4.2 Serial Interface Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12

5.5 Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14

5.5.1 Standard Parallel Port Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14

5.5.2 Enhanced Parallel Port Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14

5.5.3 Extended Capabilities Port Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15 iv 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Contents

5.5.4 Parallel Interface Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15

5.5.5 Parallel Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

5.6 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18

5.6.1 Keyboard Interface Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18

5.6.2 Pointing Device Interface Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

5.6.3 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

5.6.4 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24

5.7 Universal Serial Bus Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25

5.7.1 USB Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26

5.7.2 USB Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27

5.7.3 USB Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28

5.7.4 USB Cable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29

5.8 Audio Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29

5.8.1 Functional Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30

5.8.2 AC97 Audio Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31

5.8.3 AC97 Link Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31

5.8.4 Audio Codec. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32

5.8.5 Audio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33

5.8.6 Audio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–35

5.9 Network Interface Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36

5.9.1 Wake-On-LAN Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37

5.9.2 Alert Standard Format Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37

5.9.3 Power Management Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37

5.9.4 NIC Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38

5.9.5 NIC Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38

5.9.6 NIC Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39

6 Integrated Graphics Subsystem

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

6.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

6.2.1 Video Memory Allocation Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

6.3 Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

6.4 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

6.5 Upgrading 845G-Based Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

6.6 VGA Monitor Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

7 Power and Signal Distribution

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

7.2 Power Supply Assembly/Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

7.2.1 Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

7.2.2 Power Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

7.2.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

7.3 Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

7.3.1 3.3/5/12 VDC Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

7.3.2 Low Voltage Production/Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

7.4 Signal Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 v

Contents

8 BIOS ROM

8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

8.2 ROM Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

8.2.1 Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

8.2.2 Changeable Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

8.3 Boot Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

8.3.1 Boot Device Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

8.3.2 Network Boot (F12) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

8.3.3 Memory Detection and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

8.3.4 Boot Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

8.4 Setup Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

8.5 Client Management Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14

8.5.1 System ID and ROM Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16

8.5.2 EDID Retrieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16

8.5.3 Temperature Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

8.5.4 Drive Fault Prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

8.6 PnP Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18

8.6.1 SMBIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19

8.7 Power Management Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19

8.7.1 Independent PM Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

8.8 USB Legacy Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21

A Error Messages and Codes

B ASCII Character Set

C Keyboard

Index

vi 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

1

Introduction

1.1 About this Guide

This guide provides technical information about HP Compaq dx71xx and dc61xx series personal computers that feature the Intel Pentium 4 processor and the Intel 915G chipset. This document describes in detail the system's design and operation for programmers, engineers, technicians, and system administrators, as well as end-users wanting detailed information.

The chapters of this guide primarily describe the hardware and firmware elements and primarily deal with the system board and the power supply assembly. The appendices contain general data such as error codes and information about standard peripheral devices such as keyboards, graphics cards, and communications adapters.

This guide can be used either as an online document or in hardcopy form.

1.1.1 Online Viewing

Online viewing allows for quick navigating and convenient searching through the document. A color monitor will also allow the user to view the color shading used to highlight differential data. A softcopy of the latest edition of this guide is available for downloading in .pdf file format at the URL listed below: www.hp.com

Viewing the file requires a copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader available at no charge from Adobe

Systems, Inc. at the following URL: www.adobe.com

When viewing with Adobe Acrobat Reader, click on the ( ) icon or “Bookmarks” tab to display the navigation pane for quick access to particular places in the guide.

1.1.2 Hardcopy

A hardcopy of this guide may be obtained by printing from the .pdf file. The document is designed for printing in an 8 ½ x 11-inch format. Note that printing in black and white will lose color shading properties.

1.2 Additional Information Sources

For more information on components mentioned in this guide refer to the indicated manufacturers' documentation, which may be available at the following online sources:

■

■

■

■

HP Corporation: www.hp.com

Intel Corporation:

Standard Microsystems Corporation:

USB user group: www.intel.com

www.usb.org www.smsc.com

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 1-1

Introduction

The model numbering convention or HP systems is as follows:

1-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Introduction

The unit's serial number is located on a sticker placed on the exterior cabinet. The serial number is also written into firmware and may be read with HP Diagnostics or Insight Manager utilities.

The notational guidelines used in this guide are described in the following subsections.

1.5.1 Values

Hexadecimal values are indicated by a numerical or alpha-numerical value followed by the letter

“h.” Binary values are indicated by a value of ones and zeros followed by the letter “b.”

Numerical values that have no succeeding letter can be assumed to be decimal unless otherwise stated.

1.5.2 Ranges

Ranges or limits for a parameter are shown using the following methods:

Example A:

Example B:

Bits <7..4> = bits 7, 6, 5, and 4.

IRQ3-7, 9 = IRQ signals 3 through 7, and IRQ signal 9

1.5.3 Register Notation and Usage

This guide uses standard Intel naming conventions in discussing the microprocessor's (CPU) internal registers. Registers that are accessed through programmable I/O using an indexing scheme are indicated using the following format:

03C5.17h

Index port

Data port

In the example above, register 03C5.17h is accessed by writing the index port value 17h to the index address (03C4h), followed by a write to or a read from port 03C5h.

1.5.4 Bit Notation and Byte Values

Bit designations are labeled between brackets (i.e., “bit <0 >”). Binary values are shown with the most significant bit (MSb) on the far left, least significant bit (LSb) at the far right. Byte values in hexadecimal are also shown with the MSB on the left, LSB on the right.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 1-3

Introduction

1.6 Common Acronyms and Abbreviations

Table 1-1 lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this guide.

Table 1-1

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronym or

Abbreviation

AVI

AVGA

AWG

BAT

BCD

BIOS bis

BNC bps or b/s

BSP

BTO

CAS

CD

CD-ROM

CDS

CGA

APIC

APM

AOL

ASIC

ASF

AT

ATA

ATAPI

A

AC

ACPI

A/D

ADC

ADD or ADD2

AGP

API

Description ampere alternating current

Advanced Configuration and Power Interface analog-to-digital

Analog-to-digital converter

Advanced digital display (card)

Accelerated graphics port application programming interface

Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller advanced power management

Alert-On-LAN™ application-specific integrated circuit

Alert Standard Format

1. attention (modem commands) 2. 286-based PC architecture

AT attachment (IDE protocol)

ATA w/packet interface extensions audio-video interleaved

Advanced VGA

American Wire Gauge (specification)

Basic assurance test binary-coded decimal basic input/output system second/new revision

Bayonet Neill-Concelman (connector type) bits per second

Bootstrap processor

Built to order column address strobe compact disk compact disk read-only memory compact disk system color graphics adapter

1-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Acronym or

Abbreviation

EIA

EISA

EPP

EIDE

DRAM

DRQ

DVI dword

EDID

EDO

EEPROM

EGA

DDC

DDR

DIMM

DIN

DIP

DMA

DMI dpi

CPQ

CPU

CRIMM

CRT

CSM

DAC

DC

DCH

Ch cm

CMC

CMOS

Cntlr

Cntrl codec

Technical Reference Guide

Introduction

Table 1-1

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Description

Channel, chapter centimeter cache/memory controller complimentary metal-oxide semiconductor (configuration memory) controller control

1. coder/decoder 2. compressor/decompressor

Compaq central processing unit

Continuity (blank) RIMM cathode ray tube

1. Compaq system management 2. Compaq server management digital-to-analog converter direct current

DOS compatibility hole

Display Data Channel

Double data rate (memory) dual inline memory module

Deutche IndustriNorm (connector type) dual inline package direct memory access

Desktop management interface dots per inch dynamic random access memory data request

Digital video interface

Double word (32 bits) extended display identification data extended data out (RAM type) electrically eraseable PROM enhanced graphics adapter

Electronic Industry Association extended ISA enhanced parallel port enhanced IDE

361834-002 1-5

Introduction

1-6

Acronym or

Abbreviation in

INT

I/O

IPL

IEEE

IF

I/F

IGC hex

Hz

ICH

IDE

GART

GUI h

HW

IrDA

IRQ

ISA

FPU

FPS ft

GB

GMCH

GND

GPIO

GPOC

ESCD

EV

ExCA

FIFO

FL

FM

FPM

Table 1-1

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Description

Extended System Configuration Data (format)

Environmental Variable (data)

Exchangeable Card Architecture first in/first out flag (register) frequency modulation fast page mode (RAM type)

Floating point unit (numeric or math coprocessor)

Frames per second

Foot/feet gigabyte

Graphics/memory controller hub ground general purpose I/O general purpose open-collector

Graphics address re-mapping table graphic user interface hexadecimal hardware hexadecimal

Hertz (cycles-per-second)

I/O controller hub integrated drive element

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers interrupt flag interface integrated graphics controller inch interrupt input/output initial program loader

Infrared Data Association interrupt request industry standard architecture

361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Acronym or

Abbreviation

NIC

NiMH

NMI

NRZI ns

NT

NTSC

NVRAM

MMX

MPEG ms

MSb/MSB mux

MVA

MVW n

OS

PAL

PATA

LCD

LED

LPC

LSI

LSb/LSB

LUN m

MCH

Kb/KB

Kb/s kg

KHz kV lb

LAN

Technical Reference Guide

Table 1-1

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Description kilobits/kilobytes (x 1024 bits/x 1024 bytes) kilobits per second kilogram kilohertz kilovolt pound local area network liquid crystal display light-emitting diode

Low pin count large scale integration least significant bit/least significant byte logical unit (SCSI)

Meter

Memory controller hub multimedia extensions

Motion Picture Experts Group millisecond most significant bit/most significant byte multiplex motion video acceleration motion video window variable parameter/value network interface card/controller nickel-metal hydride non-maskable interrupt

Non-return-to-zero inverted nanosecond nested task flag

National Television Standards Committee non-volatile random access memory operating system

1. programmable array logic 2. phase alternating line

Parallel ATA

361834-002

Introduction

1-7

Introduction

1-8

Acronym or

Abbreviation

RTC

R/W

SATA

SCSI

SDR

SDRAM

SDVO

SEC

RAS rcvr

RDRAM

RGB

RH

RMS

ROM

RPM

SECAM

SF

SGRAM

PFC

PIN

PIO

PN

POST

PROM

PTR

RAM

PC

PCA

PCI

PCI-E

PCM

PCMCIA

PEG

Table 1-1

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Description

Personal computer

Printed circuit assembly peripheral component interconnect

PCI Express pulse code modulation

Personal Computer Memory Card International Association

PCI express graphics

Power factor correction personal identification number

Programmed I/O

Part number power-on self test programmable read-only memory pointer random access memory row address strobe receiver

(Direct) Rambus DRAM red/green/blue (monitor input)

Relative humidity root mean square read-only memory revolutions per minute real time clock

Read/Write

Serial ATA small computer system interface

Singles data rate (memory)

Synchronous Dynamic RAM

Serial digital video output

Single Edge-Connector sequential colour avec memoire (sequential color with memory) sign flag

Synchronous Graphics RAM

361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Acronym or

Abbreviation

TTL

TV

TX

UART

UDMA

URL us/ µs

USB

TFT

TIA

TPE

TPI

TAD

TAFI

TCP

TF

UTP

V

VAC

SPDIF

SPN

SPP

SRAM

SSE

STN

SVGA

SW

SIMD

SIMM

SMART

SMI

SMM

SMRAM

SPD

Technical Reference Guide

Table 1-1

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Description

Single instruction multiple data single in-line memory module

Self Monitor Analysis Report Technology system management interrupt system management mode system management RAM serial presence detect

Sony/Philips Digital Interface (IEC-958 specification)

Spare part number standard parallel port static RAM

Streaming SIMD extensions super twist pneumatic super VGA software telephone answering device

Temperature-sensing And Fan control Integrated circuit tape carrier package trap flag thin-film transistor

Telecommunications Information Administration twisted pair ethernet track per inch transistor-transistor logic television transmit universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter

Ultra DMA

Uniform resource locator microsecond

Universal Serial Bus unshielded twisted pair volt

Volts alternating current

361834-002

Introduction

1-9

Introduction

Acronym or

Abbreviation

VDC

VESA

VGA

VLSI

VRAM

W

WOL

WRAM

ZF

ZIF

Table 1-1

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Description

Volts direct current

Video Electronic Standards Association video graphics adapter very large scale integration

Video RAM watt

Wake-On-LAN

Windows RAM zero flag zero insertion force (socket)

1-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

2

System Overview

2.1 Introduction

The HP Compaq dc71xx and dx61xx Series Business Desktop Computers (Figure 2-1) deliver an outstanding combination of manageability, serviceability, and compatibility for enterprise environments. Based on the Intel Pentium 4 processor with the Intel 915G Chipset, these systems emphasize performance along with industry compatibility. These models feature architectures incorporating the PCI bus. All models are easily upgradeable and expandable to keep pace with the needs of the office enterprise.

HP Compaq dc7100 USDT

HP Compaq dc7100 SFF

HP Compaq dx61xx ST HP Compaq dx61xx MT HP Compaq dc7100 CMT

Figure 2-1. HP Compaq dx61xx and dc71xx Series Business Desktop Computers

This chapter includes the following topics:

■

■

■

■

Features (2.2), page 2-2

Mechanical design (2.3), page 2-4

System architecture (2.4), page 2-22

Specifications (2.5), page 2-29

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-1

System Overview

2.2 Features And Options

This section describes the standard features.

2.2.1 Standard Features

■

■

The following standard features are included on all series inless otherwise indicated:

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Intel Pentium 4 processor in LGA775 (Socket T) package

Integrated graphics controller

PC2700 and PC3200 DIMMs support on dx6100 and dc7100 models

PC2-4300 DIMM support on dx6120 models

IDE controller providing serial and parallel ATA support

Hard drive fault prediction

Eight USB 2.0 ports

Audio processor with one headphone output, one microphone input, and one line input

Network interface controller providing 10/100/1000Base T support

Plug 'n Play compatible (with ESCD support)

Intelligent Manageability support

Energy Star compliant

Security features including:

❏

❏

❏

❏

❏

Flash ROM Boot Block

Diskette drive disable, boot disable, write protect

Power-on password

Administrator password

Serial/parallel port disable

PS/2 enhanced keyboard

PS/2 scroll mouse

2-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

Table 2-1 shows the differences in features between the different PC series based on form factor:

Series

System Board Type

Serial and parallel ports

Memory:

# of sockets

Maximum memory

Memory type

Table 2-1

Difference Matrix by Form Factor

USDT dc7100 custom

Optional [1]

SFF dc7100 custom

Standard

ST MT dx6100 / dx6120 dx6100 / dx6120 custom µATX

Standard Standard

CMT dc7100

µATX

Standard

3

3 GB

DDR

4

4 GB

DDR

4

4 GB

DDR / DDR2

4

4 GB

DDR / DDR2

4

4 GB

DDR

Drive bays:

Externally accessible

Internal

PCI Express slots: x16 graphics x1

PCI 2.3 slots

1

1

0

0

1full-height

2

1

1 [2] [3]

1 [3]

2 half-height or

2 full-height [5]

Optional [7]

Both

2

1

1 [2] [3]

1 [3]

2 half-height or

2 full-height [5]

Optional [7]

No

3

2

1 [4]

1

2 full-height

MultiBay

Smart Cover Sensor / Lock

Power Supply:

Power rating

PFC

Auto-ranging

Standard

Sensor only

200-watt

Active PFC

Yes

240-watt

Active PFC

Yes

240-watt

Active PFC

Yes not supported

No

300-watt [8]

Passive PFC

No

NOTE:

[1] Supported on system board. Requires optional cable/bracket assembly.

[2] Accepts low-profile, reversed-layout ADD2/SDVO card: height = 2.5 in., length = 6.6 in.

[3] Slot not accessible in configuration using PCI riser card.

[4] Accepts standard height, normal (non-reversed) layout ADD2/SDVO card: height = 4.2 in., length = 10.5 in.

[5] Riser card configuration is a field option. Full-height PCI slots provided with configuration using PCI riser card.

Half-height dimensions: height = 2.5 in., length = 6.6 in.

Full-hieght dimensions: height = 4.2 in., length = 6.875 in

[6] PCI expansion board required for 4-slot support.

Full-height dimensions:

[7] Requires adapter.

[8] Some MT SKUs shipped with 340-watt power supplies.

4

2

1 [4]

1

2 full-height or

4 full-height [6]

Optional [7]

Both

340-watt

Active PFC

Yes

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-3

System Overview

■

■

■

■

This guide covers six form factors:

■ Ultra Slim Desktop (USDT)—Very slim design that can be used in a tradition desktop

(horizontal) orientation or as a small tower mounted in the supplied tower stand.

Small Form Factor (SFF)—A small-footprint desktop requiring minimal desk space.

Slim Tower (ST)—Slim design that can be used in a tradition desktop (horizontal) orientation or as a small tower mounted in the supplied tower stand.

Microtower (MT)- A low-height tower that requires less vertical space than a minitower.

Convertible Minitower (CMT) —an ATX-type unit providing the most expandability and being adaptable to desktop (horizontal) or floor-standing (vertical) placement.

The following subsections describe the mechanical (physical) aspects of models.

Ä CAUTION: Voltages are present within the system unit whenever the unit is plugged into a live AC outlet, regardless of the system's “Power On” condition. Always disconnect the power cable from the power outlet and/or from the system unit before handling the system unit in any way.

✎

The following information is intended primarily for identification purposes only. Before servicing these systems, refer to the applicable Service Reference Guide. Service personnel should review training materials also available on these products.

2-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

2.3.1 Cabinet Layouts

Front Views

Figure 2-2 shows the front panel components of the Ultra Slim Desktop (USDT) format factor.

3

4

Item

1

2

Description

MultiBay device bay

MultiBay device eject lever

Microphone audio In jack

Headphone audio Out jack

Figure 2-2. HP Compaq dc7100 USDT Front View

7

8

Item

5

6

Decription

USB ports 7, 8

Power LED

MultiBay device / HD activity LED

Power button

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-5

System Overview

Figure 2-3 shows the front panel components of the Small Form Factor (SFF).

5

6

3

4

Item

1

2

Description

Diskette drive activity LED

Diskette drive media door

CD-ROM drive acitvity LED

Diskette drive eject button

CD-ROM media tray

CD-ROM drive open/close button

Figure 2-3. HP Compaq dc7100 SFF Front View

9

10

11

12

Item

7

8

Decription

Microphone audio In jack

Headphone audio Out jack

USB ports 7, 8

Hard drive activity LED

Power LED

Power button

2-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Figure 2-4 shows the front panel components of the Slim Tower (ST) form factor.

System Overview

4

5

6

2

3

Item

1

Description

Micorphone audio In jack

Headphone audio Out jack

USB ports 7, 8 hard drive activity LED

Power LED

Power button

Figure 2-4. HP Compaq dx6100 ST Front View

10

11

12

8

9

Item

7

Decription

Diskette drive activity LED

Diskette media door

CD-ROM drive acitvity LED

Diskette drive eject button

CD-ROM media tray

CD-ROM drive open/close button

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-7

System Overview

Figure 2-5 shows the front panel components of the microtower (uT) form factor.

4

5

6

2

3

Item

1

Description

CD-ROM drive

CD-ROM drive activity LED

Diskette drive media door

Diskette drive activity LED

Diskette drive eject button

USB ports 7, 8

Figure 2-5. HP Compaq dx6100 MT Front View

10

11

12

8

9

Item

7

Decription

CD-ROM drive open/close button

Power button

Power LED

Hard drive activity LED

Headphone audio Out jack

Microphone audio In jack

2-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

Figure 2-6 shows the front panel components of the Convertable Minitower (CMT) form factor.

5

6

3

4

Item

1

2

Description

CD-ROM drive

CD-ROM drive activity LED

Diskette drive media door

Diskette drive activity LED

Diskette drive eject button

Hard drive activity LED

Figure 2-6. HP Compaq dc7100 CMT Front View

9

10

11

12

Item

7

8

Decription

CD-ROM drive open/close button

Power button

Power LED

USB ports 7, 8

Headphone audio Out jack

Microphone audio In jack

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-9

System Overview

Rear Views

Figure 2-7 shows the rear view of the USDT form factor.

4

5

2

3

Item

1

Description

NIC (LAN) connector (RJ-45)

VGA monitor connector (DB-15)

AC input connector

USB ports 1, 2

USB ports 3 - 6

Figure 2-7. HP Compaq dc7100 USDT, Rear View

9

--

7

8

Item

6

Description

Mouse connector (PS/2)

Keyboard connector (PS/2)

Line audio In

Headphone / Speaker audio Out

--

2-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

Figure 2-8 shows the rear views of the SFF form factor. Two configurations are available:

■

■

Without cardcage - Accepts two half-height PCI 2.3 cards, two half-height PCI Express cards

With card cage - Accepts two full-height PCI 2.3 cards only

SFF chassis without card cage

SFF Chassis with card cage

4

5

6

2

3

Item

1

Description

NIC (LAN) connector (RJ-45)

USB ports 3 - 6

Parallel port (DB-25)

Serial port (DB-9)

AC input connector

USB ports 1, 2

Figure 2-8. HP Compaq dc7100 SFF, Rear Views

10

11

--

8

9

Item

7

Description

VGA monitor connector (DB-15)

Mouse connector (PS/2)

Keyboard connector (PS/2)

Line audio In

Headphone / Speaker audio Out

--

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-11

System Overview

Figure 2-9 shows the rear views of the ST form factor. Two configurations are available:

■

■

Without cardcage - Accepts two half-height PCI 2.3 cards, two half-height PCI Express cards

With card cage - Accepts two full-height PCI 2.3 cards only

2-12

ST chassis without card cage ST chassis with card cage

5

6

3

4

Item

1

2

Description

AC input connector

Parallel port (DB-25)

USB ports 3 - 6

NIC (LAN) connector (RJ-45)

Serial port (DB-9)

Headphone / Speaker audio Out

Figure 2-9. HP Compaq dc7100 ST, Rear Views

9

10

11

--

Item

7

8

Description

Line audio In

Keyboard connector (PS/2)

Mouse connector (PS/2)

VGA monitor connector (DB-15)

USB ports 1, 2

--

361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Figure 2-10 shows the rear view of the MT form factor.

System Overview

5

6

3

4

7

Item

1

2

Description

AC voltage select switch [1]

AC line connector Microphone In jack

Keyboard connector (PS/2)

Serial port connector (DB-9)

VGA monitor connector (B-15)

Microphone In jack

USB ports 5, 6

NOTE:

[1] Switch not present on SKUs that feature auto-ranging power supply.

10

11

12

13

--

Item

8

9

Figure 2-10. HP Compaq dx6100 MT, Rear View

Description

Mouse connector (PS/2)

Parallel port connctor (DB-25)

USB ports 1 - 4

Line audio Out jack

Line audio In jack

NIC (LAN) connector (RJ-45)

--

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-13

System Overview

Figure 2-11 shows the rear view of the CMT form factor.

2-14

4

5

6

2

3

Item

1

Description

USB ports 5, 6

Microphone audio In

VGA monitor connector (DB-15)

Serial port connector (DB-9)

Keyboard connector (PS/2))

AC line connector

Figure 2-11. HP Compaq dc7100 CMT, Rear View

10

11

12

8

9

Item

7

Description

Mouse connector (PS/2)

Parallel port connector (DB-25)

USB ports 1-4

Line audio Out jack

Line audio In jack

NIC (LAN) connector (RJ-45)

361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

2.3.2 Chassis Layouts

This section describes the internal layouts of the chassis. For detailed information on servicing the chassis refer to the multimedia training and/or the maintenance and service guide for these systems.

UIltra Slim Desktop Chassis

The Ultra Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis used for the HP Compaq dc7100 models uses a compact, space-saving form factor.

1 2 3

7

4

6 5

3

4

Item

1

2

Description

Power supply assembly

DIMM sockets (3)

PCI card cage

Processor socket

Figure 2-12. USDT Chassis Layout, TopView

7

--

Item

5

6

Description

Chassis fan

MultiBay device

Hard drive

--

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-15

System Overview

Small Form Factor / Slim Tower Chassis

■

■

The chassis layouts for the Small Form Factor (SFF) used for the HP Compaq dc7100 models and the Slim Tower (ST) used for the HP Comapq dx6100 models are shown in Figure 2-13.

Features include:

Tilting drive cage assembly for easy access to processor and memory sockets

Two configurations:

❏ Without card cage:

◆

◆

◆

Two half-height, full length PCI 2.3 slots

One PCI Express x16 graphics/SDVO slot

One PCI Express x1 slot

❏ With card cage:

◆ Two full-height, full-length PCI 2.3 slots

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 6

2-16

9 8

Chassis without card cage

7 9 8

Chassis with card cage

7

4

5

2

3

Item

1

Description

Power supply assembly

DIMM sockets (4)

PCI Express x1 slot

PCI Express x16 graphics/reverse-layout slot [1]

PCI 2.3 slots (2)

7

8

Item

6

9

10

NOTE:

[1] Accepts PCI-E graphics or reversed-layout ADD2 card.

Figure 2-13. SFF / ST Chassis Layout, Top / Right Side Views

Description

Card cage

Processor socket

Chassis fan

Diskette drive bay

CD-ROM drive bay

361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

Microtower Chassis

Figure 2-14 shows the layout for the Microtower (MT) chassis used for the HP Compaq dx6100 models. Features include:

■

■

Externally accessible drive bay assembly.

Easy access to expansion slots and all socketed system board components.

1 2 3 4

5

6 q

-

9

8

7

5

6

3

4

Item

1

2

Description

Power supply assembly

Processor socket

DIMM sockets (4)

DriveLock

Externally accessible drive bays

Internally accessible drive bays

9

10

11

--

Item

7

8

NOTE:

[1] Accepts PCI-E graphics or normal-layout ADD2 card.

Figure 2-14. MT Chassis Layout, Left Side View

Description

Speaker

PCI 2.3 slots

PCI Express x1 slot

PCI Express x16 graphics/normal-layout SDVO slot [1]

Chassis fan

--

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-17

System Overview

Convertible Minitower

Figure 2-15 shows the layout for the Convertible Minitower (CMT) chassis in the minitower configuration used for HP Compaq dc7100 models. Features include:

■ Externally accessible drive bay assembly may be configured for minitower (vertical) or desktop (horizontal) position.

■ Easy access to expansion slots and all socketed system board components.

1 2 3 4

5

6 w q

-

9

8

7

5

6

3

4

Item

1

2

Description

Power supply assembly

Processor socket

DIMM sockets (4)

DriveLock

Externally accessible drive bays

Internally accessible drive bays

9

10

11

12

Item

7

8

Description

Speaker (inside card guide assembly)

Expansion board area

PCI 2.3 slots

PCI Express x1 slot

PCI Express x16 graphics/normal-layout SDVO slot [1]

Chassis fan

NOTE:

[1] Accepts PCI-E graphics or normal-layout ADD2 card.

Figure 2-15. CMT Chassis Layout, Left Side View (Minitower configuration)

2-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

2.3.3 Board Layouts

Figures 2-16 through 2-18 show the system and expansion boards for these systems.

1 2 3 o i u y t r e w q

NOTE: See USDT rear chassis illustrations for externally accessible I/O connectors.

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

Item

1

2

Description

Hood sense header

Battery

Parallel port option header

Serial port A header

Password clear jumper header

SATA #0 header

PCI 2.3 slot

Intenal speaker header

Power supply (VccP) connector

Processor socket

Figure 2-16. USDT System Board

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

17

18

19

--

13

14

15

16

Item

11

12

Description

Power button, power LED, HD LED header

Front panel audio connector

Front panel USB port connector

Chassis fan, secondary connector

Chassis fan, primary connector

DIMM sockets (3)

MultiBay riser connector

Power supply connector

Auxiliary audio input connector

--

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-19

System Overview

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g f d s a p o i u y t r e w q

9

-

11

12

13

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

Item

1

2

Description

Serial port B header

Battery

SATA #1 header

SATA #0 header

Password jumper

PCI Express x1 slot

PCI Express x16 graphics/reversed-layout SDVO slot

PCI 2.3 slots

Power supply (VccP) connector

Processor socket

Chassis fan, primary connector

Chassis fan, secondary conenctor

Power button, power LED, HD LED header

24

25

--

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

Item

14

15

NOTE:

See SFF and ST rear chassis illustrations for externally accessible I/O connectors.

Figure 2-17. SFF / ST System Board

Description

Front panel audio header

Chassis speaker connector

Front panel USB port connector

MultiBay connector

DIMM sockets (4)

CD-Audio input connector

Diskette drive connector

PATA (primary IDE) connector

Auxiliary audio input connector

Power supply connector

Cover lock (solenoid) connector

Cover sensor connector

--

2-20 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

1 z l k j h g f d s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PCI Expansion Board [1] a p o i u y t r e

System Board w q

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

2

3

Item

1

Description

PCI 2.3 slots

Battery

PCI Express x1 slot

PCI Express x16 graphics/normal-layout SDVO slot

Chassis fan header

Power supply (VccP) connector

Serial port B header [2]

Processor socket

Processor fan connector

DIMM sockets (4)

MultiBay conector [2]

Diskette drive connector

Parallel ATA connector

Power supply connector

Serial ATA #3 connector [2]

27

28

29

--

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

Item

16

17

18

Description

Serial ATA #2 connector [2]

Serial ATA #0 connector

Hood lock header [2]

Hood sense header [2]

Password clear jumper header

Power LED/button, HD LED header

Serial ATA #1 connector

CMOS clear switch

Internal speaker connector

Auxiliary audio inpout connector

CD audio input connector

Front panel USB port connector

PCI expansion board connector [2]

Front panel audio connector

--

NOTES:

See MT and CMT rear chassis illustrations for externally accessible I/O connectors.

[1] Applicable to CMT chassis only.

[2] Not included on MT system boards.

Figure 2-18. MT / CMT System Board and CMT PCI Expansion Board

8

9

-

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-21

System Overview

The systems covered in this guide feature an architecture based on the Intel Pentium 4 processor and the Intel 915G chipset (Figure 2-11). These systems allow processor upgrading with the Intel

Pentium 4 family and offer flexibility in expansion capabilities.

■

■

■

All systems covered in this guide include the following key components:

■

■

Intel Pentium 4 with Hyper-Threading technology, 32-KB L1 cache and 1-MB L2 cache.

Intel 915G/GV chipset - Includes 82915G or 82915GV GMCH north bridge and 82801

ICH6 south bridge including an integrated graphics controller, dual-channel DDR1 or DDR2

SDRAM controller, serial and parallel ATA controllers, USB 2.0 controller, and PCI controller supporting PCI 2.3 devices.

SMC 47B397 super I/O controller supporting PS/2 keyboard and mouse peripherals

AD1981B audio controller supporting line in, speaker out, and headphone out

Broadcom BCM5751 10/100/1000 network interface controller

The 915G/GV chipset provides a major portion of system functionality. Designed to compliment the latest Intel Pentium 4 processors, the chipset serves the processor through a 800-MB

Front-Side Bus (FSB). Communication between the GMCH and ICH6 components occurs through the Direct Media Interface (DMI). The SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors use the integrated graphics controller of the 82915G that may be upgraded through a PCI Express x16 graphics slot. All systems include a PCI 2.3 slot, and feature as standard a serial ATA (SATA) hard drive with support for legacy parallel ATA 100 devices including a MultiBay device.

Table 2-2 lists the differences between models.

Model

Chipset

Memory sockets

DDR2 models?

Graphics upgrade

PCI Express x16 graphics slot?

PCI Express x1 slot?

Serial / parallel ports

SATA interfaces

Table 2-2.

Architectural Differences By Form Factor

USDT

915GV

3

No

PCI 2.3 card only

No

SFF

915G

4

Yes

PCI-E or

PCI 2.3 card

Yes [1]

ST

915G

4

Yes

PCI-E or

PCI 2.3 card

Yes [1]

MT

915G

4

Yes

PCI-E or

PCI 2.3 card

Yes

CMT

915G

4

Yes

PCI-E or

PCI 2.3 card

Yes

No Yes [1] Yes [1] Yes Yes

Optional [2] Standard [3] Standard [3] Standard [3] Standard [3]

1 2 2 4 4

Notes:

[1] Slot not accessible if PCI 2.3 full-height riser is installed.

[2] Requires adapter.

[3] 2nd serial port requires adapter.

2-22 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

Pentium 4

Processor

Monitor

RGB

PCI Express x16 slot (PEG)[1]

915G/GV Chipset

Graphics

Cntlr.

915 [2]

GMCH

SDRAM

Cntlr

PCI Exp.

PEG I/F [1]

DMI

Ch A DDR/DDR2

SDRAM

Ch B DDR/DDR2

SDRAM

SATA

Hard Drive

MultiBay Device

CD-ROM

AC97 Audio

Subsystem

SATA

I/F

DMI

USB

I/F

PATA

I/F

82801

ICH6

LPC I/F

AC97 I/F

PCI Cntlr.

USB Ports 1-8

Serial I/F [1] Parallel I/F [1]

LPC47B397

I/O Cntlr.

Kybd-Mouse I/F Diskette I/F

PCI 2.3 slot(s)

NIC

I/F

PCI Express x1 slot [1]

Note:

[1] SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors only.

[2] 82915GV for USDT form factor

82915G for SFF. ST. MT, and CMT form factors

Keyboard

Mouse

Floppy

Power Supply

Figure 2-19 System Architecture, Block diagram

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-23

System Overview

2.4.1 Intel Pentium 4 Processor

The models covered in this guide feature the Intel Pentium 4 processor with Hyper-Threading technology. This processor is backward-compatible with software written for the Pentium III,

Pentium II, Pentium MMX, Pentium Pro, Pentium, and x86 microprocessors. The processor architecture includes a floating-point unit, 32-KB first and 1-MB secondary caches, and enhanced performance for multimedia applications through the use of multimedia extension

(MMX) instructions. Also included are streaming SIMD extensions (SSE and SSE2) for enhancing 3D graphics and speech processing performance. The Pentium 4 processor features

Net-Burst Architecture that uses hyper-pipelined technology and a rapid-execution engine that runs at twice the processor's core speed.

These systems employ a zero-insertion-force (ZIF) Socket-T designed for mounting an LGA775 processor package (Figure 2-20).

2-24

Figure 2-20. Processor Socket and Processor Package

To remove the processor:

1. Remove the processore heat sink/fan assembly (not shown).

2. Release the locking lever (1) by first pushing down, then out and up.

3. Pull up the securing frame (2).

4. Grasp the processor (3) by the edges and lift straight up from the socket.

✎

The processor heatsink/fan assembly mounting differs between form factors. Always use the same assembly or one of the same type when replacing the processor. Refer to the applicable

Service Reference Guide for detailed removal and replacement procedures of the heatsink/fan assembly and the processor.

361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

2.4.2 Chipset

The chipset consists of a Graphics Memory Controller Hub (GMCH), an enhanced I/O controller hub (ICH), and a firmware hub (FWH). Table 2-3 compares the functions provided by the chipsets.

Components

82915G/GV GMCH

82801EB ICH6

Table 2-3

Chipset Components

Function

Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 900 (integrated graphics controller)

PCI Express x16 graphics interface (915G only)

SDRAM controller supporting unbuffered, non-ECC PC2700/PC3200

DDR or PC2-3200/PC2-4300 DDR2 DIMMs (depending on model)

533-, or 800-MHz FSB

PCI 2.3 bus I/F

PCI Express x1

LPC bus I/F

SMBus I/F

IDE I/F with SATA and PATA support

AC ’97 controller

RTC/CMOS

IRQ controller

Power management logic

USB 1.1/2.0 controllers supporting eight (8) ports

Loaded with HP/Compaq BIOS 82802 FWH [1]

NOTE:

[1] Or equivalent component.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-25

System Overview

2.4.3 Support Components

Input/output functions not provided by the chipset are handled by other support components.

Some of these components also provide “housekeeping” and various other functions as well.

Table 2-4 shows the functions provided by the support components.

Component Name

LPC47B397 I/O Controller

BCM5751 Ethernet Controller

AD1981B Audio Codec

Table 2-4

Support Component Functions

Function

Keyboard and pointing device I/F

Diskette I/F

Serial I/F (COM1and COM2)

Parallel I/F (LPT1, LPT2, or LPT3)

PCI reset generation

Interrupt (IRQ) serializer

Power button and front panel LED logic

GPIO ports

Processor over tempurature monitoring

Fan control and monitoring

Power supply voltage monitoring

SMBus and Low Pin Count (LPC) bus I/F

10/100/1000 Fast Ethernet network interface controller.

Audio mixer

Digital-to-analog converter

Analog-to-digital converter

Analog I/O

6-channel audio support

2.4.4 System Memory

These systems implement a dual-channel Double Data Rate (DDR) memory architecture. All dx6100 and dc7100 models support PC2700 (333- MHz) and PC3200 (400-MHz) DIMMs. Only dx6120 models support DDR2, PC2-4300 (533-MHz) DIMMs.

✎

DDR and DDR2 DIMMs are NOT interchangeable. Memory type is defined by the system board.

The USDT system provides three DIMM sockets supporting up to 3 GB of memory while all other form factors provide four DIMM sockets and support a total of four gigabytes of memory.

✎

The maximum memory amounts stated above are with 1-GB memory modules using 1-Gb technology DIMMs.

2-26 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

2.4.5 Mass Storage

All models support at least two mass storage devices, with one being externally accessible for removable media. These systems provide one, two, or four SATA interfaces and one PATA interface. These systems may be preconfigured or upgraded with a 40-, 80-, or 160-GB SATA hard drive and one removable media drive such as a CD-ROM drive. Some systems also provide one MultiBay interface.

2.4.6 Serial and Parallel Interfaces

All models except those that use the USDT form factor include a serial port and a parallel port, both of which are accessible at the rear of the chassis. The USDT form factor may be upgraded with an adapter to provide serial and parallel ports. The SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors may be upgraded with an optional second serial port.

The serial interface is RS-232-C/16550-compatible and supports standard baud rates up to

115,200 as well as two high-speed baud rates of 230K and 460K. The parallel interface is

Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP1.9) and Enhanced Capability Port (ECP) compatible, and supports bi-directional data transfers.

2.4.7 Universal Serial Bus Interface

All models provide eight Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports, with two ports accessible at the front of the unit and six ports accessible on the rear panel. The USB interface provides hot plugging/unplugging functionality. These systems support USB 1.1 and 2.0 functionality on all ports.

2.4.8 Network Interface Controller

All models feature a Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Network Interface Controller (NIC) integrated on the system board. The controller provides automatic selection of 10BASE-T,

100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-T operation with a local area network and includes power-down, wake-up, and Alert-On-LAN (AOL), and Alert Standard Format (ASF) features. An RJ-45 connector with status LEDs is provided on the rear panel.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-27

System Overview

2.4.9 Graphics Subsystem

These systems use the 82915G or 82915GV GMCH component that integrates an Intel graphics controller that can drive an external VGA monitor. The integrated graphics controller (IGC) features a 333-MHz core processor and a 400-MHz RAMDAC. The controller implements

Dynamic Video Memory Technology (DVMT 3.0) for video memory. Table 2-5 lists the key features of the integrated graphics subsystem.

Recommended for:

Bus Type

Memory Amount

Memory Type

DAC Speed

Maximum 2D Res.

Software Compatibility

Outputs

Table 2-5

Integrated Graphics Subsystem Statistics

82915G or GV GMCH

Integrated Graphics Controller

Hi 2D, Entry 3D

Int. PCI Express

8 MB pre-allocated

DVMT 3.0

400 MHz

2048x1536 @ 85 Hz

Quick Draw,

DirectX 9.0,

Direct Draw,

Direct Show,

Open GL 1.4,

MPEG 1-2,

Indeo

1 RGB

The IGC of the 82915G used in the SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors supports upgrading through a PCI Express x16 graphics slot. The IGC of the 82915GV used in the USDT form factor does not support a PCI Express x16 graphic slot and may only be upgraded through the

PCI 2.3 slot.

2.4.10 Audio Subsystem

These systems use the integrated AC97 audio controller of the chipset and the ADI 1981B audio codec. These systems include microphone and line inputs and headphone and line outputs and include a 3-watt output amplifier driving an internal speaker. All models feature front panel-accessible microphone in and headphone out audio jacks as standard.

2-28 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Overview

2.5 Specifications

This section includes the environmental, electrical, and physical specifications for the systems covered in this guide. Where provided, metric statistics are given in parenthesis. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Table 2-6

Environmental Specifications (Factory Configuration)

Parameter Operating Non-operating

Ambient Air Temperature 50 o to 95 o F (10 o to 35 o C, max. rate of change < 10 °C/Hr)

Shock (w/o damage) 5 Gs [1]

Vibration 0.000215 G 2 /Hz, 10-300 Hz

Humidity

-24 o to 140 o F (-30 o to 60 o C, max. rate of change < 20

20 Gs [1]

0.0005 G 2

°C/Hr )

/Hz, 10-500 Hz

Maximum Altitude

10-90% Rh @ 28 o C max.

wet bulb temperature

10,000 ft (3048 m) [2]

5-95% Rh @ 38.7

o C max.

wet bulb temperature

30,000 ft (9144 m) [2]

NOTE:

[1] Peak input acceleration during an 11 ms half-sine shock pulse.

[2] Maximum rate of change: 1500 ft/min.

Parameter

Input Line Voltage:

Nominal:

Maximum:

Input Line Frequency Range:

Nominal:

Maximum:

Power Supply:

Maximum Continuous Power:

USDT

ST or SFF

MT

CMT

Maximum Line Current Draw:

USDT

SF or SFF

MT

CMT

Table 2-7

Electrical Specifications

U.S.

100–240 VAC

90–264 VAC

50–60 Hz

47–63 Hz

200 watts

240 watts

300 watts [1]

340 watts

4 A @ 100 VAC

5 A @ 100 VAC

8 A @ 100 VAC

6 A @ 100 VAC

NOTES:

[1] Some MT SKUs shpped with 340-watt power supplies.

International

100–240 VAC

90–264 VAC

50–60 Hz

47–63 Hz

200 watts

240 watts

300 watts [1]

340 watts

2 A @ 200 VAC

2.5 A @ 200 VAC

4 A @ 200 VAC

3.0 A @ 200 VAC

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-29

System Overview

Parameter USDT ST

Width

Depth

(7.49 cm)

12.4 in

(31.5 cm)

(10.03 cm)

13.3 in

(33.78 cm)

13.18 in

(33.48 cm)

14.9 in

(37.85 cm)

Weight [1] 13.2 lb [2]

(6.0 kg) [2]

19.5 lb

(8.8 kg)

Load-bearing ability of chassis [4]

100 lb

(45.4 kg)

100 lb

(45.4 kg)

Table 2-8

Physical Specifications

SFF

3.95 in

(10.03 cm)

13.3 in

(33.78 cm)

14.9 in

(37.85 cm)

19.5 lb

(8.8 kg)

100 lb

(45.4 kg)

MT

14.5 in

(36.8 cm)

6.88 in

17.5 cm)

16.31 in

(41.1 cm)

23.8 lb

(10.8 kg) n/a

CMT [3]

17.65 in

(44.8 cm)

6.60 in

(16.8 cm)

17.8 in

(45.21 cm)

32.5 lb

(14.7 kg)

100 lb

(45.4 kg)

NOTES:

[1] System weight may vary depending on installed drives/peripherals.

[2] Without MultiBay device installed.

[3] Minitower configuration. For desktop configuration, swap Height and Width dimensions.

[4] Applicable To unit in desktop orientation only and assumes reasonable type of load such as a monitor.

2-30 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Table 2-9

Diskette Drive Specifications

Parameter

Media Type

Measurement

3.5 in 1.44 MB/720 KB diskette

1/3 bay (1 in)

512

Height

Bytes per Sector

Sectors per Track:

High Density

Low Density

Tracks per Side:

High Density

Low Density

18

9

80

80

2 Read/Write Heads

Average Access Time:

Track-to-Track (high/low)

Average (high/low)

Settling Time

Latency Average

3 ms/6 ms

94 ms/169 ms

15 ms

100 ms

System Overview

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-31

System Overview

Parameter

Interface Type

Media Type (reading)

Media Type (writing)

Transfer Rate (Reads)

Transfer Rate (Writes):

Capacity:

Mode 1, 12 cm

Mode 2, 12 cm

8 cm

Center Hole Diameter

Disc Diameter

Disc Thickness

Track Pitch

Laser

Beam Divergence

Output Power

Type

Wave Length

Average Access Time:

Random

Full Stroke

Audio Output Level

Cache Buffer

Table 2-10

Optical Drive Specifications

48x CD-ROM

IDE

Mode 1,2, Mixed Mode, CD-DA,

Photo CD, Cdi, CD-XA

N/a

4.8 Kb/s (max sustained)

N/a

48/24/28x CD-RW Drive

IDE

Mode 1,2, Mixed Mode, CD-DA,

Photo CD, Cdi, CD-XA

CD-R, CD-RW

CD-ROM, 4.8 Kb/s;

CD-ROM/CD-R, 1.5-6 Kb/s

CD-R, 2.4 Kbps (sustained);

CD-RW, 1.5 Kbps (sustained);

650 MB @ 12 cm

550 MB

640 MB

180 MB

15 mm

8/12 cm

1.2 mm

1.6 um

15 mm

8/12 cm

1.2 mm

1.6 um

+/- 1.5 °

0.14 mW

GaAs

790 +/- 25 nm

53.5 + 1.5°

53.6 0.14 mW

GaAs

790 +/- 25 nm

<100 ms

<150 ms

0.7 Vrms

128 KB

<120 ms

<200 ms

0.7 Vrms

128 KB

2-32 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Parameter

Drive Size

Interface

Transfer Rate

Drive Protection System

Support?

Typical Seek Time (w/settling)

Single Track

Average

Full Stroke

Disk Format (logical blocks)

Rotation Speed

Drive Fault Prediction

Table 2-11

Hard Drive Specifications

40 GB

3.5 in

80 GB

3.5 in

SATA

150 MB/s

Yes

1.2 ms

8.0 ms

18 ms

78,165,360

5400/7200

SMART III

SATA

150 MB/s

Yes

0.8 ms

9.0 ms

17 ms

156,301,488

5400/7200

SMART III

160 GB

3.5 in

SATA

150 MB/s

Yes

0.8 ms

9 ms

17 ms

320,173,056

7200 RPM

SMART III

System Overview

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-33

System Overview

2-34 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

3

Processor/Memory Subsystem

3.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the processor/memory subsystem. These systems feature the Intel

Pentium 4 processor and the 915G chipset (Figure 3-1). The dx6100 and dc7100 models support

PC2700 or PC3200 DDR memory and come standard with PC3200 DIMMs installed. The dx6120 models support PC2-4300 DDR2 DIMMs only.

Pentium 4

Processor

FSB I/F

XMM1

Ch A

DIMM

XMM2 [1]

Ch A

DIMM

82915G

GMCH

SDRAM

Cntrl

Note:

[1] SFF, ST, MT, and CMT models only.

Figure 3-1. Processor/Memory Subsystem Architecture

This chapter includes the following topics:

■

■

Pentium 4 processor (3.2), page 3-2

Memory subsystem (3.3), page 3-4

Ch B

DIMM

XMM3

Ch B

DIMM

XMM4

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 3-1

Processor/Memory Subsystem

These systems each feature an Intel Pentium 4 processor in a FC-LGA775 package mounted with a passive heat sink in a zero-insertion force socket. The mounting socket allows the processor to be easily changed for servicing and/or upgrading.

3.2.1 Processor Overview

The Intel Pentium 4 processor represents the latest generation of Intel's IA32-class of processors.

Featuring Intel's NetBurst architecture and Hyper-Threading technology, the Pentium 4 processor is designed for intensive multimedia and internet applications of today and the future while maintaining compatibility with software written for earlier (Pentium III, Pentium II,

Pentium, Celeron, and x86) microprocessors. Key features of the Pentium 4 processor include:

■ Hyper-Threading Technology—The main processing loop has twice the depth (20 stages) of earlier processors allowing for increased processing frequencies.

■ Execution Trace Cache— A new feature supporting the branch prediction mechanism, the trace cache stores translated sequences of branching micro-operations ( ops) and is checked when suspected re-occurring branches are detected in the main processing loop. This feature allows instruction decoding to be removed from the main processing loop.

■ Rapid Execution Engine—Arithmetic Logic Units (ALUs) run at twice (2x) processing frequency for higher throughput and reduced latency.

■ 1-MB Advanced transfer L2 cache—Using 32-byte-wide interface at processing speed, the large L2 cache provides a substantial increase.

■ Advanced dynamic execution—Using a larger (4K) branch target buffer and improved prediction algorithm, branch mis-predictions are reduced by an average of 33 % over the

Pentium III.

■ Enhanced Floating Point Processor —With 128-bit integer processing and deeper pipelining the Pentium 4's FPU provides a 2x performance boost over the Pentium III.

■

❏

❏

❏

❏

❏

Additional Streaming SIMD extensions (SSE2)—In addition to the SSE support provided by previous Pentium processors, the Pentium 4 processor includes an additional 144 MMX instructions, further enhancing:

Streaming video/audio processing

Photo/video editing

Speech recognition

3D processing

Encryption processing

■ Quad-pumped Front Side Bus (FSB)—The FSB uses a 200-MHz clock for qualifying the buses' control signals. However, address information is transferred using a 2x strobe while data is transferred with a 4x strobe, providing a maximum data transfer rate that is four times that of earlier processors.

3-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Processor/Memory Subsystem

Figure 3-2 illustrates the internal architecture of the Intel Pentium 4 processor.

Pentium 4 Processor

Branch

Prediction

Rapid Exe. Eng.

ALUs

16-K Execution

Trace Cache

CPU

Out-of-Order

Core

128-bit

Integer

FPU

8-K

L1

Data

Cache

L2

1-MB

L2

Cache

FSB

I/F

FSB speed (max. data transfer rate) Core speed ALU Speed (Core speed x2)

Pentium Type

P4 560

P4 550

P4 540

P4 530

P4 520

Core Speed

3.60 GHz

3.40 GHz

3.20 GHz

3.00 GHz

2.80 GHz

ALU Speed

7.2 GHz

6.8 GHz

6.4 GHz

6.0 GHz

5.6 GHz

Figure 3-2. Pentium 4 Processor Internal Architecture

FSB Speed

800 MHz

800 MHz

800 MHz

800 MHz

800 MHz

L2 Cache Size

1 MB

1 MB

1 MB

1 MB

1 MB

The Intel Pentium 4 increases processing speed by using higher clock speeds with hyper-pipelined technology, therefore handling significantly more instructions at a time. The

Pentium 4 features a branch prediction mechanism improved with the addition of an execution trace cache and a refined prediction algorithm. The execution trace cache can store 12 kilobytes of micro-ops (decoded instructions dealing with branching sequences) that are checked when re-occurring branches are processed. Code that is not executed (bypassed) is no longer stored in the L1 cache as was the case in the Pentium III.

The front side bus (FSB) of the Pentium 4 uses a 200-MHz clock but provides bi- and quad-pumped transfers through the use of 2x- and 4x-MHz strobes. The Pentium 4 processor is compatible with software written for x86 processors.

3.2.2 Processor Upgrading

All units use the LGA775 ZIF (Socket T) mounting socket. These systems require that the processor use an integrated heatsink/fan assembly. A replacement processor must use the same type heatsink/fan assembly as the original to ensure proper cooling.

The processor uses a PLGA775 package consisting of the processor die mounted “upside down” on a PC board. This arrangement allows the heat sink to come in direct contact with the processor die. The heat sink and attachment clip are specially designed provide maximum heat transfer from the processor component.

Ä CAUTION: Attachment of the heatsink to the processor is critical on these systems. Improper attachment of the heatsink will likely result in a thermal condition. Although the system is designed to detect thermal conditions and automatically shut down, such a condition could still result in damage to the processor component. Refer to the applicable Service Reference Guide for processor installation instructions.

Ä CAUTION: Installing a processor that is not supported by the system board may cause damage to the system board and/or the processor.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 3-3

Processor/Memory Subsystem

3-4

The dx6100 and dc7100 models support PC2700 or PC3200 DDR memory and come standard with PC3200 DIMMs installed. The dx6120 models support PC2-4300 DDR2 memory only.

✎

The DDR SDRAM “PCxxxx” reference designates bus bandwidth (i.e., a PC2700 DIMM can, operating at a 333-MHz effective speed, provide a throughput of 2700 MBps (8 bytes ×

333MHz)). Memory speed types may be mixed within a system, although the system BIOS will set the memory controller to work at speed of the slowest DIMM.

■

■

The system board provides three or four DIMM sockets depending on form factor:

■

■

XMM1 (black connector), channel A (all form factors

XMM2 (DDR, blue connector; DDR2, white connector), channel A (SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors only)

XMM3 (black connector), channel B (all form factors)

XMM4 (DDR, blue connector; DDR2, white connector), channel B (all form factors)

■

■

DIMMs do not need to be installed in pairs although installation of pairs (an equal DIMM for each channel) provides the best performance. The BIOS will detect the DIMM population and set the system accordingly as follows:

Single-channel mode - DIMMs installed for one channel only

Dual-channel asymetric mode - DIMMs installed for both channels but of unequal channel capacities.

■ Dual-channel interleaved mode (recommended)- DIMMs installed for both channels and offering equal channel capacities, proving the highest performance.

These systems require DIMMs with the following parameters:

■

■

■

■

■

■

Unbuffered, compatible with SPD rev. 1.0

256-Mb, 512-Mb, and 1-Gb memory technology x8 and x16 DDR devices

CAS latency (CL) of 2.5 or 3

Single or double-sided

Non-ECC memory only

The SPD format supported by these systems complies with the JEDEC specification for 128-byte

EEPROMs. This system also provides support for 256-byte EEPROMs to include additional

HP-added features such as part number and serial number. The SPD format as supported in this system (SPD rev. 1) is shown in Table 3-1.

If BIOS detects an unsupported DIMM, a “memory incompatible” message will be displayed and the system will halt. These systems are shipped with non-ECC DIMMs only. Refer to chapter 8 for a description of the BIOS procedure of interrogating DIMMs.

An installed mix of DIMM types (i.e., PC2700 and PC3200, CL 2 and CL 3) is acceptable but operation will be constrained to the level of the DIMM with the lowest (slowest) performance specification.

If an incompatible DIMM is detected the NUM LOCK will blink for a short period of time during POST and an error message may or may not be displayed before the system hangs.

361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Processor/Memory Subsystem

Table 3-1 shows suggested memory configurations for these systems.

NOTE: Table 3-1 does not list all possible configurations. Balanced-capacity, dual-channel loading yields best performance.

Socket 1

Channel A

Socket 2 [1]

128-MB

128-MB none none

128-MB

128-MB

256-MB

256-MB

128-MB

128-MB none none

512-MB

512-MB

1-GB

1-GB

1-GB

1-GB none none none none

1-GB

1-GB

NOTE:

[1] SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors only.

Table 3-1.

DIMM Socket Loading

Channel B

Socket 3 Socket 4 none

128-MB

128-MB

128-MB none none none

128-MB none

256-MB none

512-MB none

1-GB

1-GB

1-GB none none none none none none none

1-GB

Total

128-MB

256-MB (dual-channel)

384-MB (dual-channel)

512-MB (dua- channel)

256-MB

512-MB (dual-channel)

512-MB

1-GB (dual-channel)

1-GB

2-GB (dual-channel)

3-GB (dual-channel)

4-GB (dual-channel)

✎

DDR and DDR2 DIMMs are NOT interchangeable. Memory type is defined by the system board.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 3-5

Processor/Memory Subsystem

The SPD address map is shown in Table 3-2.

14

15

16

10

11

12

13

8

9

5

6, 7

3

4

1

2

0

Byte

20

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

Table 3-2

SPD Address Map (SDRAM DIMM)

Description

No. of Bytes Written Into EEPROM

Total Bytes (#) In EEPROM

Memory Type

No. of Row Addresses On DIMM

No. of Column Addresses On DIMM

No. of Module Banks On DIMM

Data Width of Module

Voltage Interface Standard of DIMM

Cycletime @ Max CAS Latency (CL)

Access From Clock

Config. Type (Parity, Nonparity...)

Refresh Rate/Type

Width, Primary DRAM

Error Checking Data Width

Min. Clock Delay

Burst Lengths Supported

No. of Banks For Each Mem. Device

CAS Latencies Supported

CS# Latency

Write Latency

DIMM Attributes

Memory Device Attributes

Min. CLK Cycle Time at CL X-1

Max. Acc. Time From CLK @ CL X-1

Notes

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[4]

[4][5]

[6]

[4]

[4]

[4]

[4]

[7]

[7]

25

Byte

26

27

28

29

30-31

32-61

Description

Min. CLK Cycle Time at CL X-2

Max. Acc. Time From CLK @ CL X-2

Min. Row Prechge. Time

Min. Row Active to Delay

Min. RAS to CAS Delay

Reserved

Superset Data

62

63

64-71

72

SPD Revision

Checksum Bytes 0-62

JEP-106E ID Code

DIMM OEM Location

73-90

91-92

93-94

95-98

OEM’s Part Number

OEM’s Rev. Code

Manufacture Date

OEM’s Assembly S/N

OEM Specific Data 99-

125

126

127

128 - 131

Intel frequency check

Reserved

Compaq header “CPQ1”

132 Header checksum

133 - 145 Unit serial number

146

147

148

DIMM ID

Checksum

Reserved

NOTES:

[1] Programmed as 128 bytes by the DIMM OEM

[2] Must be programmed to 256 bytes.

[3] High order bit defines redundant addressing: if set (1), highest order RAS# address must be re-sent as highest order CAS# address.

[4] Refer to memory manufacturer’s datasheet

[5] MSb is Self Refresh flag. If set (1), assembly supports self refresh.

[6] Back-to-back random column addresses.

[7] Field format proposed to JEDEC but not defined as standard at publication time.

[8] Field specified as optional by JEDEC but required by this system.

[9] HP usage. This system requires that the DIMM EEPROM have this space available for reads/writes.

[10] Serial # in ASCII format (MSB is 133). Intended as backup identifier in case vender data is invalid.

Can also be used to indicate s/n mismatch and flag system adminstrator of possible system Tampering.

[11]Contains the socket # of the module (first module is “1”). Intended as backup identifier (refer to note [10]).

[8]

[8]

[8]

[8]

[8]

[8]

[8]

Notes

[7]

[7]

[7]

[7]

[7]

[7]

[7]

[9]

[9]

[9][10]

[9][11]

[9]

[9]

3-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Processor/Memory Subsystem

Figure 3-3 shows the system memory map.

Main

Memory

Area

FFFF FFFFh

FFE0 0000h

F000 0000h

High BIOS Area

DMI/APIC

Area

4 GB

PCI

Memory

Area

Top of DRAM

0100 0000h

00FF FFFFh

IGC (1-32 MB)

TSEG

Main

Memory

16 MB

Main

Memory

DOS

Compatibilty

Area

0010 0000h

000F FFFFh BIOS

Extended BIOS

Expansion Area

Legacy Video

Base Memory

0000 0000h

1 MB

640 KB

✎

All locations in memory are cacheable. Base memory is always mapped to DRAM. The next 128

KB fixed memory area can, through the north bridge, be mapped to DRAM or to PCI space.

Graphics RAM area is mapped to PCI or AGP locations.

Figure 3-3. System Memory Map

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 3-7

Processor/Memory Subsystem

3-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

4

System Support

4.1 Introduction

This chapter covers subjects dealing with basic system architecture and covers the following topics:

■

■

■

■

■

PCI bus overview (4.2), page 4-1

System resources (4.3), page 4-11

Real-time clock and configuration memory (4.4), page 4-19

System management (4.5), page 4-21

Register map and miscellaneous functions (4.6), page 4-26

This chapter covers functions provided by off-the-shelf chipsets and therefore describes only basic aspects of these functions as well as information unique to the systems covered in this guide. For detailed information on specific components, refer to the applicable manufacturer's documentation.

4.2 PCI Bus Overview

✎

This section describes the PCI bus in general and highlights bus implementation in this particular system. For detailed information regarding PCI bus operation, refer to the appropriate PCI specification or the PCI web site: www.pcisig.com.

These systems implement the following types of PCI buses:

■

■

PCI 2.3 - Legacy parallel interface operating at 33-MHz

PCI Express - High-performance interface capable of using multiple TX/RX high-speed lanes of serial data streams

The PCI bus handles address/data transfers through the identification of devices and functions on the bus. A device is typically defined as a component or slot that resides on the PCI bus (although some components such as the GMCH and ICH6 are organized as multiple devices). A function is defined as the end source or target of the bus transaction. A device may contain one or more functions. In the standard configuration these systems use a hierarchy of three PCI buses (Figure

4-1). The PCI bus #0 is internal to the chipset components and is not physically accessible. The

Direct Media Interface (DMI) links the GMCH and ICH6 components and operates as a subset of the PCI bus. All PCI slots and the NIC function internal to the ICH6 reside on PCI bus #2.

4-1 Technical Reference Guide 361834-002

System Support

82915G/GV [1]

GMCH

Memory

Cntlr

Function

PCI Bus 0

Host-DMI Bridge

Integrated

Graphics

Controller

Host-PCI Exp.

Bridge

RGB Monitor

PCI Express x16 graphics slot [2]

DMI Link

DMI

PCI 2.3

Bridge

Function

PCI Exp.

Port 1

Function

PCI Exp.

Port 2

82801 ICH6

PCI Bus 1

IDE

Cntlr

Function

SATA

Cntlr

Function

USB I/F

Cntlr

Function

LPC

Bridge

Function

AC97

Cntlr

Function

Function

NIC

Cntlr

PCI Express x1 slot [1]

PCI 2.3 slot(s)

Notes:

[1] USDT form factor; 82915GV; SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors, 82915G

[2] SFF. ST, MT, and CMT form factors only.

Figure 4-1. PCI Bus Devices and Functions

4.2.1 PCI 2.3 Bus Operation

The PCI 2.3 bus consists of a 32-bit path (AD31-00 lines) that uses a multiplexed scheme for handling both address and data transfers. A bus transaction consists of an address cycle and one or more data cycles, with each cycle requiring a clock (PCICLK) cycle. High performance is realized during burst modes in which a transaction with contiguous memory locations requires that only one address cycle be conducted and subsequent data cycles are completed using auto-incremented addressing. Four types of address cycles can take place on the PCI bus; I/O, memory, configuration, and special. Address decoding is distributed (left up to each device on the PCI bus).

I/O and Memory Cycles

For I/O and memory cycles, a standard 32-bit address decode (AD31..0) for byte-level addressing is handled by the appropriate PCI device. For memory addressing, PCI devices decode the AD31..2 lines for dword-level addressing and check the AD1,0 lines for burst

(linear-incrementing) mode. In burst mode, subsequent data phases are conducted a dword at a time with addressing assumed to increment accordingly (four bytes at a time).

4-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

Configuration Cycles

Devices on the PCI bus must comply with PCI protocol that allows configuration of that device by software. In this system, configuration mechanism #1 (as described in the PCI Local Bus specification Rev. 2.3) is employed. This method uses two 32-bit registers for initiating a configuration cycle for accessing the configuration space of a PCI device. The configuration address register (CONFIG_ADDRESS) at 0CF8h holds a value that specifies the PCI bus, PCI device, and specific register to be accessed. The configuration data register (CONFIG_DATA) at

0CFCh contains the configuration data.

PCI Configuration Data Register

I/O Port 0CFCh, R/W, (8-, 16-, 32-bit access)

Bit

31

Function

Configuration Enable

0 = Disabled

1 = Enable

30..24

Reserved—read/write 0s

23..16

Bus Number. Selects PCI bus

15..11

PCI Device Number. Selects PCI

device for access

10..8

Function Number. Selects function of

selected PCI device.

7..2

1,0

Register Index. Specifies config. reg.

Configuration Cycle Type ID.

00 = Type 0

01 = Type 1

PCI Configuration Address Register

I/O Port 0CF8h, R/W, (32-bit access only)

Bit

31..0

Function

Configuration Data.

Two types of configuration cycles are used. A Type 0 (zero) cycle is targeted to a device on the

PCI bus on which the cycle is running. A Type 1 cycle is targeted to a device on a downstream

PCI bus as identified by bus number bits <23..16>. With three or more PCI buses, a PCI bridge may convert a Type 1 to a Type 0 if it's destined for a device being serviced by that bridge or it may forward the Type 1 cycle unmodified if it is destined for a device being serviced by a downstream bridge. Figure 4-2 shows the configuration cycle format and how the loading of

0CF8h results in a Type 0 configuration cycle on the PCI bus. The Device Number (bits <15..11> determines which one of the AD31..11 lines is to be asserted high for the IDSEL signal, which acts as a “chip select” function for the PCI device to be configured. The function number (CF8h, bits <10..8>) is used to select a particular function within a PCI component.

Register 0CF8h

Results in:

AD31..0

(w/Type 00

Config. Cycle)

3

Reserved

2 2 1 1

Bus

Number

Device

Number

IDSEL (only one signal line asserted)

NOTES:

[1] Bits <1,0> : 00 = Type 0 Cycle, 01 = Type 1 cycle

Type 01 cycle only. Reserved on Type 00 cycle.

1 1 8 7

Function

Number

2 1 0 [1]

Register

Index

Function

Number

Register

Index

Figure 4-2. Configuration Cycle

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-3

System Support

Table 4-1 shows the standard configuration of device numbers and IDSEL connections for components and slots residing on a PCI 2.3 bus.

Table 4-1

PCI Component Configuration Access

PCI Component

82915G GMCH:

Host/DMI Bridge

Host/PCI Expr. Bridge

Integrated Graphics Cntlr.

PCI Express x16 graphics slot [1]

82801EB ICH6

PCI Bridge

LPC Bridge

IDE Controller

Serial ATA Controller

SMBus Controller

USB I/F #1

USB I/F #2

USB I/F #3

USB I/F #4

USB 2.0 Controller

AC97 Audio Controller

AC97 Modem Controller

Network Interface Controller

PCI Express port 1

PCI Express port 2

PCI 2.3 slot 1

PCI 2.3 slot 2

PCI 2.3 slot 3

PCI 2.3 slot 4

Notes Function #

[1]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[3]

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

3

0

7

2

2

3

0

1

2

3

0

0

1

0

0

NOTES:

[1] Not used in these systems.

[2] SFF, ST, MT, & CMT form factors only.

[3] CMT form factor with PCI expansion board.

Device #

4

9

30

0

28

28

29

29

29

30

30

31

31

31

31

29

29

10

11

28

28

2

0

8

8

8

8

0

64

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

PCI Bus

#

IDSEL

Wired to:

--

0

0

0

32 --

--

AD20

AD25

AD27

AD29

4-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

Configuration

Space

Header

The register index (CF8h, bits <7..2>) identifies the 32-bit location within the configuration space of the PCI device to be accessed. All PCI devices can contain up to 256 bytes of configuration data (Figure 4-3), of which the first 64 bytes comprise the configuration space header.

Device-Specific Area

Min. Lat. Min. GNT Int. Pin

Reserved

Reserved

Int. Line

Ex pansion ROM Base Address

Subs ystem ID Subs ystem Vendor ID

Card Bus CIS Pointer

Base Address Registers

BIST Hdr. T ype

Class Code

Status

Device ID

Lat. Timer Line Size

Revision ID

Command

Vendor ID

10h

0Ch

08h

04h

00h

PCI Configuration Space Type 0

FCh

40h

3Ch

38h

34h

30h

2Ch

28h

31 24 23 16 15 8 7 0

Index

FCh

Device-Specific Area

Brid ge Control Int. Pin

Ex pansion ROM Base Address

Reserved

Int. Line

I/O Limit Upper 16 Bits I/O Base U pper 16 Bits

Prefetchable Limit U pper 32 Bits

Prefetchable Base U pper 32 Bits

Prefetch. Mem. Limit Prefetch. Mem. Base

Memor y Limit

Secondar y Status

2 nd

Lat.Tmr

Sub. Bus #

Memor y Base

I/O Limit

Sec. Bus #

I/O Base

Pri. Bus #

Base Address Registers

BIST Hdr. T ype

Class Code

Status

Device ID

Lat. Timer Line Size

Revision ID

Command

Vendor ID

10h

0Ch

08h

04h

00h

40h

3Ch

38h

34h

30h

2Ch

28h

24h

20h

1Ch

18h

PCI Configuration Space Type 1

Data required by PCI protocol Not required

Figure 4-3. PCI Configuration Space Mapping

PCI 2.3 Bus Master Arbitration

The PCI bus supports a bus master/target arbitration scheme. A bus master is a device that has been granted control of the bus for the purpose of initiating a transaction. A target is a device that is the recipient of a transaction. The Request (REQ), Grant (GNT), and FRAME signals are used by PCI bus masters for gaining access to the PCI bus. When a PCI device needs access to the PCI bus (and does not already own it), the PCI device asserts it's REQn signal to the PCI bus arbiter (a function of the system controller component). If the bus is available, the arbiter asserts the GNTn signal to the requesting device, which then asserts FRAME and conducts the address phase of the transaction with a target. If the PCI device already owns the bus, a request is not needed and the device can simply assert FRAME and conduct the transaction. Table 4-3 shows the grant and request signals assignments for the devices on the PCI bus.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-5

System Support

Table 4-3.

PCI Bus Mastering Devices

Device

PCI Connector Slot 1

PCI Connector Slot 2

PCI Connector Slot 3

PCI Connector Slot 4

REQ/GNT Line

REQ0/GNT0

REQ1/GNT1

REQ2/GNT2

REQ3/GNT3

Note

[1]

[2]

[2]

NOTE:

[1]SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors only.

[2] CMT form factor with PCI expansion board

PCI bus arbitration is based on a round-robin scheme that complies with the fairness algorithm specified by the PCI specification. The bus parking policy allows for the current PCI bus owner

(excepting the PCI/ISA bridge) to maintain ownership of the bus as long as no request is asserted by another agent. Note that most CPU-to-DRAM and AGP-to-DRAM accesses can occur concurrently with PCI traffic, therefore reducing the need for the Host/PCI bridge to compete for

PCI bus ownership.

4.2.2 PCI Express Bus Operation

The PCI Express bus is a high-performace extension of the legacy PCI bus specification. The PCI

Express bus uses the following layers:

■

■

■

■

Software/driver layer

Transaction protocol layer

Link layer

Physical layer

Software/Driver Layer

The PCI Express bus maintains software compatibility with PCI 2.3 and earlier versions so that there is no impact on existing operating systems and drivers. During system intialization, the PCI

Express bus uses the same methods of device discovery and resource allocation that legacy

PCI-based operating systems and drivers are designed to use. The use of PCI configuration space and the programmability of I/O devices are also used in the same way as for legacy PCI buses.

The software/driver layer provides read and write requests to the transaction layer for handling a data transfer.

Transaction Protocol Layer

The transaction protocol layer processes read and write requests from the software/driver layer and generates request packets for the link layer. Each packet includes an identifier allowing any required responcse packets to be directed to the originator.

PCI Express protocol supports the three legacy PCI address spaces (memory, I/O, configuration) as well as a new message space. The message space allows in-band processing of interrupts through use of the Message Signal Interrupt (MSI) introduced with the PCI 2.2 specification. The

MSI method eliminates the need for hard-wired sideband signals by incorporating those functions into packets.

4-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

Link Layer

The link layer provides data integrity by adding a sequence information prefix and a CRC suffix to the packet created by the transaction layer. Flow-control methods ensure that a packet will only be transferred if the receiving device is ready to accomodate it. A corrupted packet will be automatically re-sent.

Physical Layer

The PCI Express bus uses a point-to-point, high-speed TX/RX serial lane topology. that can be scalable as to the the end point’s requirements. One or more full-duplex lanes transfer data serially. Each lane consists of two differential pairs of signal paths (Figure 4-4), one for transmit, one for receive.

System Board PCI Express Card

Device A

TX

RX

Device B

Figure 4-4. PCI Express Bus Lane

Each byte is transferred using 8b/10b encoding. which embeds the clock signal with the data.

Operating at a 2.5 Gigabit transfer rate, a single lane can provide a data flow of 200 MBps. The bandwidth is increased if additional lanes are available for use. During the initialization process, two PCI Express devices will negotiate for the number of lanes available and the speed the link can operate at.

In a x1 (single lane) interface, all data bytes are transferred serially over the lane. In a multi-lane interface, data bytes are distributed across the lanes using a multiplex scheme as shown in Table

4-4:

4

5

2

3

6

7

Byte #

0

1

Table 4-4.

PCI Express Byte Transfer

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 x1

Transfer

Lane #

0

1

2

3

2

3

0

1 x4

Transfer

Lane #

4

5

2

3

6

7

0

1 x8

Transfer

Lane #

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-7

System Support

For a PCI Express x16 transfer, a lane will be re-used every17th byte of a transfer. The mux-demux process provided by the physical layer is transparent to the other layers and to software/drivers.

The SFF, ST, MT MT, and CMT forma factors provide two PCI Express slots: a PCI Express x16

(16-lane) slot specifically designed for a graphics controller, and a general purpose PCI Express x1 (1-lane) slot.

4.2.3 Option ROM Mapping

During POST, the PCI bus is scanned for devices that contain their own specific firmware in

ROM. Such option ROM data, if detected, is loaded into system memory's DOS compatibility area (refer to the system memory map shown in chapter 3).

4.2.4 PCI Interrupts

Eight interrupt signals (INTA- thru INTH-) are available for use by PCI devices. These signals may be generated by on-board PCI devices or by devices installed in the PCI slots. For more information on interrupts including PCI interrupt mapping refer to the “System Resources” section 4.3.

4.2.5 PCI Power Management Support

This system complies with the PCI Power Management Interface Specification (rev 1.0). The

PCI Power Management Enable (PME-) signal is supported by the chipset and allows compliant

PCI peripherals to initiate the power management routine.

4-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

4.2.6 PCI Connectors

PCI 2.3 Connector

A1 A49 A52 A62

B2

B49

Figure 4-5. PCI 2.3 Bus Connector (32-Bit, 5.0-volt Type)

B52 B62

INTB-

INTD-

PRSNT1-

RSVD

PRSNT2-

GND

GND

RSVD

B Signal

-12 VDC

TCK

GND

TDO

+5 VDC

+5 VDC

GND

CLK

GND

REQ-

+5 VDC

AD31

AD29

11

12

13

14

07

08

09

10

03

04

05

06

Pin

01

02

19

20

21

15

16

17

18

A Signal

TRST-

+12 VDC

TMS

TDI

+5 VDC

INTA-

INTC-

+5 VDC

Reserved

+5 VDC

Reserved

GND

GND

+3.3 AUX

RST-

+5 VDC

GNT-

GND

PME-

AD30

+3.3 VDC

B Signal

GND

AD27

AD25

+3.3 VDC

C/BE3-

AD23

GND

AD21

AD19

+3.3 VDC

AD17

C/BE2-

GND

IRDY-

+3.3 VDC

DEVSEL-

GND

LOCK-

PERR-

+3.3 VDC

SERR-

32

33

34

35

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

Pin

22

23

40

41

42

36

37

38

39

A Signal

AD28

AD26

GND

AD24

IDSEL

+3.3 VDC

AD22

AD20

GND

AD18

AD16

+3.3 VDC

FRAME-

GND

TRDY-

GND

STOP-

+3.3 VDC

SDONE n

SBO-

GND

B Signal

+3.3 VDC

C/BE1-

AD14

GND

AD12

AD10

GND

Key

Key

AD08

AD07

+3.3 VDC

AD05

AD03

GND

AD01

+5 VDC

ACK64-

+5 VDC

+5 VDC

53

54

55

56

49

50

51

52

45

46

47

48

Pin

43

44

57

58

59

60

61

62

A Signal

PAR

AD15

+3.3 VDC

AD13

AD11

GND

AD09

Key

Key

C/BE0-

+3.3 VDC

AD06

AD04

GND

AD02

AD00

+5 VDC

REQ64-

+5 VDC

+5 VDC

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-9

System Support

PCI Express Connectors

A1 A11 A12 A18 x1 Connector x16 Connector

B1 B11 B12

Figure 4-6. PCI Express Bus Connectors

A82

B82

4-10

PETp2

PETn2

GND

GND

PETp3

PETn3

PETn0

GND

PRSNT2#

GND

PETp1

PETn1

GND

GND

B Signal

+12 VDC

+12 VDC

RSVD

GND

SMCLK

+5 VDC

GND

+3.3 VDC

JTAG1

3.3 Vaux

WAKE

RSVD

GND

PETp0

23

24

25

26

27

28

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

07

08

09

10

03

04

05

06

Pin

01

02

51

52

53

54

55

56

47

48

49

50

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

Pin

29

30

GND

GND

PERp2

PERn2

GND

GND

GND

PERp0

PERn0

GND

RSVD

GND

PERp1

PERn1

A Signal

PRSNT1#

+12 VDC

+12 VDC

GND

+5 VDC

JTAG2

JTAG4

JTAG5

+3.3 VDC

+3.3 VDC

PERST#

GND

REFCLK+

REFCLK-

PETn8

GND

GND

PETp9

PETn9

GND

GND

GND

PETp7

PETn7

GND

PRSNT2#

GND

PETp8

GND

GND

PETp5

PETn5

GND

GND

PETp6

PETn6

B Signal

GND

RSVD

PRSNT2#

GND

PETp4

PETn4

PETn13

GND

GND

PETp14

PETn14

GND

GND

PETp15

PETn15

GND

PRSNT2#

RSVD

PETn11

GND

GND

PETp12

PETn12

GND

GND

PETp13

B Signal

GND

PETp10

PETn10

GND

GND

PETp11

75

76

77

78

71

72

73

74

79

80

81

82

67

68

69

70

63

64

65

66

59

60

61

62

Pin

57

58

GND

PERp8

PERn8

GND

GND

PERp9

PERp6

PERn6

GND

GND

PERp7

PERn7

GND

RSVD

PERp4

PERn4

GND

GND

PERp5

PERn5

GND

GND

A Signal

PERp3

PERn3

GND

RSVD

RSVD

GND

GND

PERp13

PERn13

GND

GND

PERp14

PERn14

GND

GND

PERp15

PERn15

GND

GND

PERp11

PERn11

GND

GND

PERp12

PERn12

GND

A Signal

PERn9

GND

GND

PERp10

PERn10

GND

361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

This section describes the availability and basic control of major subsystems, otherwise known as resource allocation or simply “system resources.” System resources are provided on a priority basis through hardware interrupts and DMA requests and grants.

4.3.1 Interrupts

The microprocessor uses two types of hardware interrupts; maskable and nonmaskable. A maskable interrupt can be enabled or disabled within the microprocessor by the use of the STI and CLI instructions. A nonmaskable interrupt cannot be masked off within the microprocessor, although it may be inhibited by hardware or software means external to the microprocessor.

Maskable Interrupts

The maskable interrupt is a hardware-generated signal used by peripheral functions within the system to get the attention of the microprocessor. Peripheral functions produce a unique INTA-H

(PCI) or IRQ0-15 (ISA) signal that is routed to interrupt processing logic that asserts the interrupt (INTR-) input to the microprocessor. The microprocessor halts execution to determine the source of the interrupt and then services the peripheral as appropriate.

Most IRQs are routed through the I/O controller of the super I/O component, which provides the serializing function. A serialized interrupt stream is then routed to the ICH component.

Interrupts may be processed in one of two modes (selectable through the F10 Setup utility):

■

■

8259 mode

APIC mode

These modes are described in the following subsections.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-11

System Support

8259 Mode

The 8259 mode handles interrupts IRQ0-IRQ15 in the legacy (AT-system) method using

8259-equivalent logic. Table 4-7 lists the standard source configuration for maskable interrupts and their priorities in 8259 mode. If more than one interrupt is pending, the highest priority

(lowest number) is processed first.

Table 4-7.

Maskable Interrupt Priorities and Assignments

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

14

15

--

4

5

2

3

Priority Signal (Typical)

1 IRQ0 Interval timer 1, counter 0

IRQ1

IRQ8-

IRQ9

IRQ10

Keyboard

Real-time clock

Unused

PCI devices/slots

IRQ11

IRQ12

IRQ13

IRQ14

IRQ15

IRQ3

IRQ4

IRQ5

IRQ6

IRQ7

IRQ2

Audio codec

Mouse

Coprocessor (math)

Primary IDE controller

Sec. IDE I/F controller (not available on SATA units)

Serial port (COM2)

Serial port (COM1)

Network interface controller

Diskette drive controller

Parallel port (LPT1)

NOT AVAILABLE (Cascade from interrupt controller 2)

4-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

INTA-

INTB-

INTC-

INTD-

INTE-

INTF-

INTG-

INTH-

APIC Mode

The Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC) mode provides enhanced interrupt processing with the following advantages:

■

■

■

Eliminates the processor's interrupt acknowledge cycle by using a separate (APIC) bus

Programmable interrupt priority

Additional interrupts (total of 24)

The APIC mode accommodates eight PCI interrupt signals (INTA-..INTH-) for use by PCI devices. The PCI interrupts are evenly distributed to minimize latency and wired as follows:

Wired to

PCI

Slot 1

INTA-

—

INTB-

—

—

INTC-

INTD-

—

PCI

Slot 2

INTD-

—

INTA-

—

—

INTB-

INTC-

—

PCI

Slot 3

INTB-

—

INTC-

—

—

INTD-

INTA-

—

PCI

Slot 4

INTD-

—

INTA-

—

—

INTB-

INTC-

—

NOTES:

[1] Connection internal to the ICH. Will be reported by BIOS as using INTA but is NOT shared with other functions using INTA.

MT, CMT form factors only.

SFF, ST, MT, CMT form factors only.

The PCI interrupts can be configured by PCI Configuration Registers 60h..63h to share the standard ISA interrupts (IRQn).

✎

The APIC mode is supported by the Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating systems. Systems running the Windows 95 or 98 operating system will need to run in 8259 mode.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-13

System Support

Maskable Interrupt processing is controlled and monitored through standard AT-type

I/O-mapped registers. These registers are listed in Table 4-8.

Table 4-8.

Maskable Interrupt Control Registers

I/O Port Register

020h Base Address, Int. Cntlr. 1

021h

0A0h

0A1h

Initialization Command Word 2-4, Int. Cntlr. 1

Base Address, Int. Cntlr. 2

Initialization Command Word 2-4, Int. Cntlr. 2

The initialization and operation of the interrupt control registers follows standard AT-type protocol.

Non-Maskable Interrupts

Non-maskable interrupts cannot be masked (inhibited) within the microprocessor itself but may be maskable by software using logic external to the microprocessor. There are two non-maskable interrupt signals: the NMI- and the SMI-. These signals have service priority over all maskable interrupts, with the SMI- having top priority over all interrupts including the NMI-.

NMI- Generation

The Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI-) signal can be generated by one of the following actions:

■

■

Parity errors detected on a PCI bus (activating SERR- or PERR-).

Microprocessor internal error (activating IERRA or IERRB)

The SERR- and PERR- signals are routed through the ICH6 component, which in turn activates the NMI to the microprocessor.

4-14 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

The NMI Status Register at I/O port 061h contains NMI source and status data as follows:

NMI Status Register 61h

5

4

3

1

0

Bit

7

6

2

Function

NMI Status:

0 = No NMI from system board parity error.

1 = NMI requested, read only

IOCHK- NMI:

0 = No NMI from IOCHK-

1 = IOCHK- is active (low), NMI requested, read only

Interval Timer 1, Counter 2 (Speaker) Status

Refresh Indicator (toggles with every refresh)

IOCHK- NMI Enable/Disable:

0 = NMI from IOCHK- enabled

1 = NMI from IOCHK- disabled and cleared (R/W)

System Board Parity Error (PERR/SERR) NMI Enable:

0 = Parity error NMI enabled

1 = Parity error NMI disabled and cleared (R/W)

Speaker Data (R/W)

Inteval Timer 1, Counter 2 Gate Signal (R/W)

0 = Counter 2 disabled

1 = Counter 2 enabled

Functions not related to NMI activity

After the active NMI has been processed, status bits <7> or <6> are cleared by pulsing bits <2> or <3> respectively.

The NMI Enable Register (070h, <7>) is used to enable/disable the NMI signal. Writing 80h to this register masks generation of the NMI-. Note that the lower six bits of register at I/O port 70h affect RTC operation and should be considered when changing NMI- generation status.

SMI- Generation

The SMI- (System Management Interrupt) is typically used for power management functions.

When power management is enabled, inactivity timers are monitored. When a timer times out,

SMI- is asserted and invokes the microprocessor's SMI handler. The SMI- handler works with the

APM BIOS to service the SMI- according to the cause of the timeout.

Although the SMI- is primarily used for power management the interrupt is also employed for the QuickLock/QuickBlank functions as well.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-15

System Support

4.3.2 Direct Memory Access

Direct Memory Access (DMA) is a method by which a device accesses system memory without involving the microprocessor. Although the DMA method has been traditionally used to transfer blocks of data to or from an ISA I/O device, PCI devices may also use DMA operation as well.

The DMA method reduces the amount of CPU interactions with memory, freeing the CPU for other processing tasks.

✎

This section describes DMA in general. For detailed information regarding DMA operation, refer to the data manual for the Intel 82801 I/O Controller Hub.

The 82801 ICH6 component includes the equivalent of two 8237 DMA controllers cascaded together to provide eight DMA channels, each (excepting channel 4) configurable to a specific device. Table 4-9 lists the default configuration of the DMA channels.

Table 4-9.

Default DMA Channel Assignments

Device ID DMA Channel

Controller 1 (byte transfers)

0

1

2

3

Controller 2 (word transfers)

4

5

6

7

Spare

Audio subsystem

Diskette drive

Parallel port

Cascade for controller 1

Spare

Spare

Spare

All channels in DMA controller 1 operate at a higher priority than those in controller 2. Note that channel 4 is not available for use other than its cascading function for controller 1. The DMA controller 2 can transfer words only on an even address boundary. The DMA controller and page register define a 24-bit address that allows data transfers within the address space of the CPU.

In addition to device configuration, each channel can be configured (through PCI Configuration

Registers) for one of two modes of operation:

■

■

LPC DMA

PC/PCI DMA

The LPC DMA mode uses the LPC bus to communicate DMA channel control and is implemented for devices using DMA through the LPC47B397 I/O controller such as the diskette drive controller.

The PC/PCI DMA mode uses the REQ#/GNT# signals to communicate DMA channel control and is used by PCI expansion devices.

The DMA logic is accessed through two types of I/O mapped registers; page registers and controller registers.

4-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

DMA Page Registers

The DMA page register contains the eight most significant bits of the 24-bit address and works in conjunction with the DMA controllers to define the complete (24-bit) address for the DMA channels. Table 4-10 lists the page register port addresses.

Table 4-10.

DMA Page Register Addresses

DMA Channel

Controller 1 (byte transfers)

Ch 0

Ch 1

Ch 2

Ch 3

Controller 2 (word transfers)

Ch 4

Ch 5

Ch 6

Ch 7

Refresh

Page Register I/O Port

087h

083h

081h

082h n/a

08Bh

089h

08Ah

08Fh [see note]

NOTE:

The DMA memory page register for the refresh channel must be programmed with 00h for proper operation.

The memory address is derived as follows:

24-Bit Address—Controller 1 (Byte Transfers)

8-Bit Page Register 8-Bit DMA Controller

A23..A16

A15..A00

24-Bit Address—Controller 2 (Word Transfers)

8-Bit Page Register

A23..A17

16-Bit DMA Controller

A16..A01, (A00 = 0)

Note that address line A16 from the DMA memory page register is disabled when DMA controller 2 is selected. Address line A00 is not connected to DMA controller 2 and is always 0 when word-length transfers are selected.

By not connecting A00, the following applies:

■ The size of the the block of data that can be moved or addressed is measured in 16-bits

(words) rather than 8-bits (bytes).

■ The words must always be addressed on an even boundary.

DMA controller 1 can move up to 64 Kbytes of data per DMA transfer. DMA controller 2 can move up to 64 Kwords (128 Kbytes) of data per DMA transfer. Word DMA operations are only possible between 16-bit memory and 16-bit peripherals.

The RAM refresh is designed to perform a memory read cycle on each of the 512 row addresses in the DRAM memory space. Refresh operations are used to refresh memory on the 32-bit memory bus and the ISA bus. The refresh address is provided on lines SA00 through SA08.

Address lines LA23..17, SA18,19 are driven low.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-17

System Support

The remaining address lines are in an undefined state during the refresh cycle. The refresh operations are driven by a 69.799-KHz clock generated by Interval Timer 1, Counter 1. The refresh rate is 128 refresh cycles in 2.038 ms.

DMA Controller Registers

Table 4-11 lists the DMA Controller Registers and their I/O port addresses. Note that there is a set of registers for each DMA controller.

Status

Command

Mode

Write Single Mask Bit

Write All Mask Bits

Software DRQx Request

Base and Current Address—Ch 0

Current Address—Ch 0

Base and Current Word Count—Ch 0

Current Word Count—Ch 0

Base and Current Address—Ch 1

Current Address—Ch 1

Base and Current Word Count—Ch 1

Current Word Count—Ch 1

Base and Current Address—Ch 2

Current Address—Ch 2

Base and Current Word Count—Ch 2

Current Word Count—Ch 2

Base and Current Address—Ch 3

Current Address—Ch 3

Base and Current Word Count—Ch 3

Current Word Count—Ch 3

Temporary (Command)

Reset Pointer Flip-Flop (Command)

Master Reset (Command)

Reset Mask Register (Command)

Table 4-11.

DMA Controller Registers

004h

005h

005h

006h

006h

007h

007h

00Dh

00Ch

00Dh

00Eh

000h

001h

001h

002h

002h

003h

003h

004h

008h

008h

00Bh

00Ah

00Fh

009h

000h

0C8h

0CAh

0CAh

0CCh

0CCh

0CEh

0CEh

0DAh

0D8h

0DAh

0DCh

0C0h

0C2h

0C2h

0C4h

0C4h

0C6h

0C6h

0C8h

0D0h

0D0h

0D6h

0D4h

0DEh

0D2h

0C0h

R

R

R

W

R

W

R

W

W

W

W

R

W

R

W

R

W

R

W

W

W

W

W

R

W

W

4-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

4.4 Real-Time Clock and Configuration Memory

The Real-time clock (RTC) and configuration memory (also referred to as “CMOS”) functions are provided by the 82801 component and is MC146818-compatible. As shown in the following figure, the 82801 ICH6 component provides 256 bytes of battery-backed RAM divided into two

128-byte configuration memory areas. The RTC uses the first 14 bytes (00-0Dh) of the standard memory area. All locations of the standard memory area (00-7Fh) can be directly accessed using conventional OUT and IN assembly language instructions through I/O ports 70h/71h, although the suggested method is to use the INT15 AX=E823h BIOS call.

0Dh

0Ch

0Bh

0Ah

09h

08h

07h

06h

05h

04h

03h

02h

01h

00h

Register D

Register C

Register B

Register A

Year

Month

Date of Month

Day of Week

Hours (Alarm)

Hours (Timer)

Minutes (Alarm)

Minutes (Timer)

Seconds (Alarm)

Seconds (Timer)

82801

Extended Config.

Memory Area

(128 bytes)

Standard Config.

Memory Area

(114 bytes)

RTC Area

(14 bytes)

FFh

80h

7Fh

0Eh

0Dh

00h

CMOS

Figure 4 11. Configuration Memory Map

A lithium 3-VDC battery is used for maintaining the RTC and configuration memory while the system is powered down. During system operation a wire-Ored circuit allows the RTC and configuration memory to draw power from the power supply. The battery is located in a battery holder on the system board and has a life expectancy of four to eight years. When the battery has expired it is replaced with a Renata CR2032 or equivalent 3-VDC lithium battery.

4.4.1 Clearing CMOS

The contents of configuration memory (including the Power-On Password) can be cleared by the following procedure:

1. Turn off the unit.

2. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and/or system unit.

3. Remove the chassis hood (cover) and insure that no LEDs on the system board are illuminated.

4. On the system board, press and hold the CMOS clear button for at least 5 seconds.

5. Replace the chassis hood (cover).

6. Reconnect the AC power cord to the outlet and/or system unit.

7. Turn the unit on.

To clear only the Power-On Password refer to section 4.5.1.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-19

System Support

4.4.2 CMOS Archive and Restore

During the boot sequence the BIOS saves a copy of NVRAM (CMOS contents, password(s) and other system variables) in a portion of the flash ROM. Should the system become un-usable, the last good copy of NVRAM data can be restored with the Power Button Override function. This function is invoked with the following procedure:

1. With the unit powered down, press and release the power button.

2. Immediately after releasing the power button in step 1, press and hold the power button until the unit powers down. This action will be recorded as a Power Button Override event.

With the next startup sequence the BIOS will detect the occurrence of the Power Button Override event and will load the backup copy of NVRAM from the ROM to the CMOS.

✎

The Power Button Override feature does not allow quick cycling of the system (turning on then off). If the power cord is disconnected during the POST routine, the splash screen image may become corrupted, requiring a re-flashing of the ROM (refer to chapter 8, BIOS ROM).

4-20 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

4.4.3 Standard CMOS Locations

Table 4-12 describes standard configuration memory locations 0Ah-3Fh. These locations are accessible through using OUT/IN assembly language instructions using port 70/71h or BIOS function INT15, AX=E823h.

Table 4-12.

Configuration Memory (CMOS) Map

13h

14h

15h

16h

17h

18h

19h

1Ah

1Bh

1Ch

1Dh

1Eh

1Fh

Location Function

00-0Dh

0Eh

Real-time clock

Diagnostic status

0Fh

10h

11h

12h

System reset code

Diskette drive type

Reserved

Hard drive type

Security functions

Equipment installed

Base memory size, low byte/KB

Base memory size, high byte/KB

Extended memory, low byte/KB

Extended memory, high byte/KB

Hard drive 1, primary controller

Hard drive 2, primary controller

Hard drive 1, secondary controller

Hard drive 2, secondary controller

Enhanced hard drive support

Reserved

Power management functions

Location

24h

25h

26h

27h

28h

29h

2Ah

2Bh

2Ch

2Dh

2Eh-2Fh

30h-31h

32h

33h

34h

35h

36h

37h-3Fh

40-FFh

Function

System board ID

System architecture data

Auxiliary peripheral configuration

Speed control external drive

Expanded/base mem. size, IRQ12

Miscellaneous configuration

Hard drive timeout

System inactivity timeout

Monitor timeout, Num Lock Cntrl

Additional flags

Checksum of locations 10h-2Dh

Total extended memory tested

Century

Miscellaneous flags set by BIOS

International language

APM status flags

ECC POST test single bit

Power-on password

Feature Control/Status

NOTES:

Assume unmarked gaps are reserved.

Higher locations (>3Fh) contain information that should be accessed using the INT15, AX=E845h

BIOS function (refer to Chapter 8 for BIOS function descriptions).

This section describes functions having to do with security, power management, temperature, and overall status. These functions are handled by hardware and firmware (BIOS) and generally configured through the Setup utility.

4.5.1 Security Functions

These systems include various features that provide different levels of security. Note that this subsection describes only the hardware functionality (including that supported by Setup) and does not describe security features that may be provided by the operating system and application software.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-21

System Support

Power-On / Setup Password

These systems include a power-on and setup passwords, which may be enabled or disabled

(cleared) through a jumper on the system board. The jumper controls a GPIO input to the 82801

ICH6 that is checked during POST. The password is stored in configuration memory (CMOS) and if enabled and then forgotten by the user will require that either the password be cleared

(preferable solution and described below) or the entire CMOS be cleared (refer to section 4.4.1).

To clear the password, use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the system and disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and/or system unit.

2. Remove the cover (hood) as described in the appropriate User Guide or Maintainance And

Service Reference Guide. Insure that all system board LEDs are off (not illuminated).

3. Locate the password clear jumper (header is labeled E49 on these systems) and move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 and place on (just) pin 2 (for safekeeping).

4. Replace the cover.

5. Re-connect the AC power cord to the AC outlet and/or system unit.

6. Turn on the system. The POST routine will clear and disable the password.

7. To re-enable the password feature, repeat steps 1-6, replacing the jumper on pins 1 and 2 of header E49.

Setup Password

The Setup utility may be configured to be always changeable or changeable only by entering a password. Refer to the previous procedure (Power On / Setup Password) for clearing the Setup password.

Cable Lock Provision

These systems include a chassis cutout (on the rear panel) for the attachment of a cable lock mechanism.

I/O Interface Security

The serial, parallel, USB, and diskette interfaces may be disabled individually through the Setup utility to guard against unauthorized access to a system. In addition, the ability to write to or boot from a removable media drive (such as the diskette drive) may be enabled through the Setup utility. The disabling of the serial, parallel, and diskette interfaces are a function of the

LPC47B397 I/O controller. The USB ports are controlled through the 82801.

Chassis Security

Some systems feature Smart Cover (hood) Sensor and Smart Cover (hood) Lock mechanisms to inhibit unauthorized tampering of the system unit.

Smart Cover Sensor

Some systems include a plunger switch that, when the cover (hood) is removed, closes and grounds an input of the 82801 component. The battery-backed logic will record this “intrusion” event by setting a specific bit. This bit will remain set (even if the cover is replaced) until the system is powered up and the user completes the boot sequence successfully, at which time the bit will be cleared. Through Setup, the user can set this function to be used by Alert-On-LAN and or one of three levels of support for a “cover removed” condition:

4-22 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

Level 0—Cover removal indication is essentially disabled at this level. During POST, status bit is cleared and no other action is taken by BIOS.

Level 1—During POST the message “The computer's cover has been removed since the last system start up” is displayed and time stamp in CMOS is updated.

Level 2—During POST the “The computer's cover has been removed since the last system start up” message is displayed, time stamp in CMOS is updated, and the user is prompted for the administrator password. (A Setup password must be enabled in order to see this option).

Smart Cover Lock (Optional)

Some systems support an optional solenoid-operated locking bar that, when activated, prevents the cover (hood) from being removed. The GPIO ports 44 and 45 of the LPC47B397 I/O controller provide the lock and unlock signals to the solenoid. A locked hood may be bypassed by removing special screws that hold the locking mechanism in place. The special screws are removed with the Smart Cover Lock Failsafe Key.

4.5.2 Power Management

This system provides baseline hardware support of ACPI- and APM-compliant firmware and software. Key power-consuming components (processor, chipset, I/O controller, and fan) can be placed into a reduced power mode either automatically or by user control. The system can then be brought back up (“wake-up”) by events defined by the ACPI specification. The ACPI wake-up events supported by this system are listed as follows:

ACPI Wake-Up Event

Power Button

RTC Alarm

Wake On LAN (w/NIC)

PME

Serial Port Ring

USB

Keyboard

Mouse

System Wakes From

Suspend or soft-off

Suspend or soft-off

Suspend or soft-off

Suspend or soft-off

Suspend or soft-off

Suspend only

Suspend only

Suspend only

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-23

System Support

4.5.3 System Status

These systems provide a visual indication of system boot and ROM flash status through the keyboard LEDs and operational status using bi-colored power and hard drive activity LEDs as indicated in Tables 4-13 and 4-14 respectively.

✎

The LED indications listed in Table 4-13 are valid only for PS/2-type keyboards. A USB keyboard will not provide LED status for the listed events, although audible (beep) indications will occur.

Table 4-13.

PS/2 Keyboard System Boot/ROM Flash Status LED Indications

Event

System memory failure [1]

Graphics controller failure [2]

System failure prior to graphics cntlr. initialization [3]

ROMPAQ diskette not present, faulty, or drive prob.

Password prompt

Invalid ROM detected—flash failed

Keyboard locked in network mode

Successful boot block ROM flash

NUM Lock

LED

Blinking

Off

Off

On

Off

Blinking [4]

Blinking [5]

On [6]

CAPs Lock

LED

Off

Blinking

Off

Off

On

Blinking [4]

Blinking [5]

On [6]

NOTES:

[1]Accompanied by 1 short, 2 long audio beeps

[2]Accompanied by 1 long, 2 short audio beeps

[3]Accompanied by 2 long, 1 short audio beeps

[4]All LEDs will blink in sync twice, accompanied by 1 long and three short audio beeps

[5]LEDs will blink in sequence (NUM Lock, then CAPs Lock, then Scroll Lock)

[6]Accompanied by rising audio tone.

Badkdd

Table 4-14 lists the audible and visible indications provided by system status conditions. .

Scroll Lock

LED

Off

Off

Blinking

Off

Off

Blinking [4]

Blinking [5]

On [6]

System Status

S0: System on (normal operation)

S1: Suspend

S3: Suspend to RAM

S4: Suspend to disk

S5: Soft off

Processor thermal shutdown

Processor not seated / installed

Power supply overload failure

Memory error (pre-video)

Video error

Table 4-14.

System Operational Status LED Indications

PowerLED Beeps [2]

PCA failure detected by BIOS (pre-video)

Invalid ROM checksum error

Boot failure (after power on)

Bad option card

Steady green

Blinks green @ .5 Hz

Blinks green @ .5 Hz

Off – clear

Off – clear

Blinks red 2 times @ I Hz [1]

Blinks red 3 times @ I Hz [1]

Blinks red 4 times @ I Hz [1]

Blinks red 5 times @ I Hz [1]

Blinks red 6 times @ I Hz [1]

Blinks red 7 times @ I Hz [1]

Blinks red 8 times @ I Hz [1]

Blinks red 9 times @ I Hz [1]

Blinks red 10 times @ I Hz [1]

None

None

None

None

None

2 [2]

3 [2]

4 [2]

5 [2]

6 [2]

7 [2]

8 [2]

9 [2]

10 [2]

Action Required none none none none none

Check air flow, fans, heatsink

Check processor presence/seating

Check voltage selector, devices, sys. bd

Check DIMMs, system board

Check graphics card or system board

Replace system board

Reflash BIOS ROM

Check power supply, processor, sys. bd

Replace option card

[1] Repeated after 2 second pause.

[2] Beeps are produced by the on-board piezo speaker, NOT the chassis speaker.

[3] Beeps are repeated for 5 cycles, after which only blinking LED indication continues.

4-24 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

4.5.4 Thermal Sensing and Cooling

All systems feature a variable-speed fan mounted as part of the processor heatsink assembly. All systems also provide or support an auxiliary chassis fan. All fans are controlled through temperature sensing logic on the system board and/or in the power supply. There are some electrical differences between form factors and between some models, although the overall functionally is the same. Typical cooling conditions include the following:

1. Normal—Low fan speed.

2. Hot processor—ASIC directs Speed Control logic to increase speed of fan(s).

3. Hot power supply—Power supply increases speed of fan(s).

4. Sleep state—Fan(s) turned off. Hot processor or power supply will result in starting fan(s).

The RPM (speed) of all fans is the result of the temperature of the CPU as sensed by speed control circuitry. The fans are controlled to run at the slowest (quietest) speed that will maintain proper cooling.

✎

Units using chassis and CPU fans must have both fans connected to their corresponding headers to ensure proper cooling of the system.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-25

System Support

4.6 Register Map and Miscellaneous Functions

This section contains the system I/O map and information on general-purpose functions of the

ICH6 and I/O controller.

4.6.1 System I/O Map

Table 4-15 lists the fixed addresses of the input/output (I/O) ports.

I/O Port

0000..001Fh

0020..002Dh

002E, 002Fh

0030..003Dh

0040..0042h

004E, 004Fh

0050..0052h

0060..0067h

0070..0077h

0080..0091h

0092h

0093..009Fh

00A0..00B1h

00B2h, 00B3h

00B4..00BDh

Table 4-15

System I/O Map

Function

DMA Controller 1

Interrupt Controller 1

Index, Data Ports to LPC47B397 I/O Controller (primary)

Interrupt Controller

Timer 1

Index, Data Ports to LPC47B397 I/O Controller (secondary)

Timer / Counter

Microcontroller, NMI Controller (alternating addresses)

RTC Controller

DMA Controller

Port A, Fast A20/Reset Generator

DMA Controller

Interrupt Controller 2

APM Control/Status Ports

Interrupt Controller

00F0h

0170..0177h

01F0..01F7h

0278..027Fh

02E8..02EFh

02F8..02FFh

0370..0377h

0376h

0378..037Fh

03B0..03DFh

03BC..03BEh

03E8..03EFh

03F0..03F5h

03F6h

03F8..03FFh

04D0, 04D1h

0678..067Fh

0778..077Fh

07BC..07BEh

0CF8h

0CF9h

0CFCh

Coprocessor error register

IDE Controller 2 (active only if standard I/O space is enabled for primary drive)

IDE Controller 1 (active only if standard I/O space is enabled for secondary drive)

Parallel Port (LPT2)

Serial Port (COM4)

Serial Port (COM2)

Diskette Drive Controller Secondary Address

IDE Controller 2 (active only if standard I/O space is enabled for primary drive)

Parallel Port (LPT1)

Graphics Controller

Parallel Port (LPT3)

Serial Port (COM3)

Diskette Drive Controller Primary Addresses

IDE Controller 1 (active only if standard I/O space is enabled for sec. drive)

Serial Port (COM1)

Interrupt Controller

Parallel Port (LPT2)

Parallel Port (LPT1)

Parallel Port (LPT3)

PCI Configuration Address (dword access only )

Reset Control Register

PCI Configuration Data (byte, word, or dword access)

NOTE:

Assume unmarked gaps are unused, reserved, or used by functions that employ variable I/O address mapping. Some ranges may include reserved addresses.

4-26 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

System Support

4.6.2 LPC47B397 I/O Controller Functions

The LPC47B397 I/O controller contains various functions such as the keyboard/mouse interfaces, diskette interface, serial interfaces, and parallel interface. While the control of these interfaces uses standard AT-type I/O addressing (as described in chapter 5) the configuration of these functions uses indexed ports unique to the LPC47B397. In these systems, hardware strapping selects I/O addresses 02Eh and 02Fh at reset as the Index/Data ports for accessing the logical devices within the LPC47B397. Table 4-16 lists the PnP standard control registers for the

LPC47B397.

Index

02h

03h

07h

20h

21h

22h

23h

24h

25h

26h

27h

28-2Fh

Table 4-16.

LPC47B397 I/O Controller Control Registers

Function

Configuration Control

Reserved

Logical Device (Interface) Select:

00h = Diskette Drive I/F

01h = Reserved

02h = Reserved

03h = Parallel I/F

04h = Serial I/F (UART 1/Port A)

05h = Serial I/F (UART 2/Port B)

06h = Reserved

07h = Keyboard I/F

08h = Reserved

09h = Reserved

0Ah = Runtime Registers (GPIO Config.)

0Bh = SMBus Configuration

Super I/O ID Register (SID)

Revision

Logical Device Power Control

Logical Device Power Management

PLL / Oscillator Control

Reserved

Configuration Address (Low Byte)

Configuration Address (High Byte)

Reserved

Reset Value

00h

00h

56h

--

00h

00h

04h

NOTE:

For a detailed description of registers refer to appropriate SMC documentation.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-27

System Support

The configuration registers are accessed through I/O registers 2Eh (index) and 2Fh (data) after the configuration phase has been activated by writing 55h to I/O port 2Eh. The desired interface

(logical device) is initiated by firmware selecting logical device number of the 47B347 using the following sequence:

1. Write 07h to I/O register 2Eh.

2. Write value of logical device to I/O register 2Fh.

3. Write 30h to I/O register 2Eh.

4. Write 01h to I/O register 2Fh (this activates the interface).

Writing AAh to 2Eh deactivates the configuration phase.

The systems covered in this guide utilize the following specialized functions built into the LPC

47B397 I/O Controller:

■ Power/Hard drive LED control—The I/O controller provides color and blink control for the front panel LEDs used for indicating system events (refer to Table 4-14).

■ Intruder sensing—The battery-backed D-latch logic internal to the LPC47B397 is connected to the hood sensor switch to record hood (cover) removal.

■ Hood lock/unlock—Supported on SFF, ST, and CMT form factors, logic internal to the

LPC47B397 controls the lock bar mechanism.

■ I/O security—The parallel, serial, and diskette interfaces may be disabled individually by software and the LPC47B397's disabling register locked. If the disabling register is locked, a system reset through a cold boot is required to gain access to the disabling (Device Disable) register.

■ Processor present/speed detection—One of the battery-back general-purpose inputs (GPI26) of the LPC47B397 detects if the processor has been removed. The occurrence of this event is passed to the ICH6 that will, during the next boot sequence, initiate the speed selection routine for the processor.

■ Legacy/ACPI power button mode control—The LPC47B397 receives the pulse signal from the system's power button and produces the PS On signal according to the mode (legacy or

ACPI) selected. Refer to chapter 7 for more information regarding power management.

4-28 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

5

Input/Output Interfaces

5.1 Introduction

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

This chapter describes the standard (i.e., system board) interfaces that provide input and output

(I/O) porting of data and specifically discusses interfaces that are controlled through I/O-mapped registers. The following I/O interfaces are covered in this chapter:

PATA/SATA interface (5.2), page 5-1

Diskette drive interface (5.3), page 5-7

Serial interfaces (5.4), page 5-12

Parallel interface (5.5), page 5-14

Keyboard/pointing device interface (5.6), page 5-18

Universal serial bus interface (5.7), page 5-25

Audio subsystem (5.8), page 5-29

Network interface controller (5.9), page 5-36

These systems provide both legacy EIDE (i.e., parallel ATA or PATA) and serial ATA (SATA) interfaces. All systems are shipped configured with SATA hard drives.

One 40-pin IDE connector is included on the system board. The controller can be configured for the following modes of operation:

■ Programmed I/O (PIO) mode—CPU controls drive transactions through standard I/O mapped registers of the IDE drive.

■ 8237 DMA mode—CPU offloads drive transactions using DMA protocol with transfer rates up to 16 MB/s.

■ Ultra ATA/100 mode—Preferred bus mastering source-synchronous protocol providing transfer rates of 100 MB/s.

IDE Programming

The IDE interface is configured as a PCI device during POST and controlled through

I/O-mapped registers at runtime. Non-DOS (non-Windows) operating systems may require using

Setup (F10) for drive configuration.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-1

Input/Output Interfaces

IDE Configuration Registers

The IDE controller is configured as a PCI device with bus mastering capability. The PCI configuration registers for the IDE controller function (PCI device #31, function #1) are listed in

Table 5-1.

09h

0Ah

0Bh

0Dh

0Eh

PCI Conf.

Address Register

00-01h Vender ID

02-03h

04-05h

06-07h

08h

Device ID

PCI Command

PCI Status

Revision ID

Programming

Sub-Class

Base Class Code

Master Latency Timer

Header Type

Table 5-1.

EIDE PCI Configuration Registers (82801)

80h

01h

01h

00h

00h

Reset

Value

PCI Conf.

Addr.

Register

8086h 0F..1Fh

Reserved

[1] 20-23h

0000h 2C, 2Dh

0280h 2E, 2Fh

00h 30..3Fh

BMIDE Base Address

Subsystem Vender ID

Subsystem ID

Reserved

40-43h

44h

48h

4A-4Bh

54h

Pri./Sec. IDE Timing

Slave IDE Timing

Sync. DMA Control

Sync. DMA Timing

EIDE I/O Config.Register

NOTE:

[1] ICH6 = 244Bh; ICH6 = 24CBh

0’s

00h

00h

0000h

00h

Reset

Value

0’s

1

0000h

0000h

0’s

5-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

IDE Bus Master Control Registers

The IDE interface can perform PCI bus master operations using the registers listed in Table 5-2.

These registers occupy 16 bytes of variable I/O space set by software and indicated by PCI configuration register 20h in the previous table.

Table 5-2.

IDE Bus Master Control Registers

04h

08h

0Ah

0Ch

I/O

Address

Offset

Size

(Bytes)

00h

02h

1

1

Register

Bus Master IDE Command (Primary)

Bus Master IDE Status (Primary)

4

1

2

4

Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer (Pri.)

Bus Master IDE Command (Secondary)

Bus Master IDE Status (Secondary)

Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer (Sec.)

Default

Value

00h

00h

0000 0000h

00h

00h

0000 0000h

NOTE:

Unspecified gaps are reserved, will return indeterminate data, and should not be written to.

IDE (PATA) Connector

These systems provide a standard 40-pin connector for a primary IDE device and in most factory configurations connects to a optical drive (CD or DVD). Some signals are re-defined for

UATA/33 and higher modes. Device power is supplied through a separate connector.

Figure 5-1. 40-Pin IDE (PATA) Connector.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-3

Input/Output Interfaces

Table 5-3.

40-Pin IDE (PATA) Connector Pinout

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

16

17

18

19

20

6

7

4

5

2

3

Pin Signal Description

1 RESETReset

GND

DD7

Ground

Data Bit <7>

DD8

DD6

DD9

DD5

Data Bit <8>

Data Bit <6>

Data Bit <9>

Data Bit <5>

DD10

DD4

DD11

DD3

DD12

DD2

DD13

DD1

DD14

DD0

DD15

GND

--

Data Bit <10>

Data Bit <4>

Data Bit <11>

Data Bit <3>

Data Bit <12>

Data Bit <2>

Data Bit <13>

Data Bit <1>

Data Bit <14>

Data Bit <0>

Data Bit <15>

Ground

Key

32

33

34

35

28

29

30

31

36

37

38

39

40

24

25

26

27

Pin Signal

21 DRQ

22

23

GND

IOW-

GND

IOR-

GND

IORDY

CSEL

DAK-

GND

IRQn

IO16-

DA1

DSKPDIAG

DA0

DA2

CS0-

CS1-

HDACTIVE-

GND

Description

DMA Request

Ground

I/O Write [1]

Ground

I/O Read [2]

Ground

I/O Channel Ready [3]

Cable Select

DMA Acknowledge

Ground

Interrupt Request [4]

16-bit I/O

Address 1

Pass Diagnostics

Address 0

Address 2

Chip Select

Chip Select

Drive Active (front panel LED) [5]

Ground

NOTES:

[1] On UATA/33 and higher modes, re-defined as STOP.

[2] On UATA/33 and higher mode reads, re-defined as DMARDY-.

On UATA/33 and higher mode writes, re-defined as STROBE.

[3] On UATA/33 and higher mode reads, re-defined as STROBE-.

On UATA/33 and higher mode writes, re-defined as DMARDY-.

[4] Primary connector wired to IRQ14, secondary connector wired to IRQ15.

[5] Pin 39 is used for spindle sync and drive activity (becomes SPSYNC/DACT-) when synchronous drives are connected.

5-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

SATA Interfaces

These systems provide one, two, or four serial ATA (SATA) interfaces that can provide certain advantages over legacy EIDE (PATA) interface including:

■

■

Higher transfer rates: up to 1.5 Gb/s (150 MB/s)

Reduced wiring (smaller cable assemblies)

The SATA interface duplicates most of the functionality of the EIDE interface through a register interface that is equivalent to that of the legacy IDE host adapter.

SATA Programming

The SATA interface is configured as a PCI device during POST and controlled through

I/O-mapped registers at runtime. Non-DOS (non-Windows) operating systems may require using

Setup (F10) for drive configuration.

SATA Configuration Registers

The SATA controller is configured as a PCI device with bus mastering capability. The PCI configuration registers for the SATA controller function (PCI device #31, function #2) are listed in Table 5-4.

Table 5-4.

SATA PCI Configuration Registers (82801, Device 31/Function 2)

PCI Conf.

Addr.

00-01h

02-03h

04-05h

06-07h

08h

09h

0Ah

0Bh

0Dh

0Eh

Register

Vender ID

Device ID

PCI Command

PCI Status

Revision ID

Programming

Sub-Class

Base Class Code

Master Latency Timer

Header Type

Reset

Value

PCI Conf.

Addr.

8086h 0F..1Fh

24D1h 10-17h

0000h 18-1Fh

02B0h 20-23h

00h

8Ah

2C, 2Dh

2E, 2Fh

01h

01h

00h

00h

34h

3Ch

3Dh

40-57h

Register

Reserved

Pri. Cmd, Cntrl.

Addrs.

Sec. Cmd, Cntrl.

Addrs.

BMstr Base Address

Reset

Value

0’s

1 (both)

1 (both)

1

Subsystem Vender ID 0000h

Subsystem ID 0000h

Capabilities pointer

Interrupt Line

Interrupt Pin

Timing, Control

80h

00h

01h

All 0’s

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-5

Input/Output Interfaces

SATA Bus Master Control Registers

The SATA interface can perform PCI bus master operations using the registers listed in Table

5-5. These registers occupy 16 bytes of variable I/O space set by software and indicated by PCI configuration register 20h in the previous table. As indicated, these registers are virtually a copy of those used by EIDE operations discussed in the EIDE section.

I/O Addr.

Offset

00h

02h

04h

08h

0Ah

0Ch

Table 5-5.

IDE Bus Master Control Registers

Size

(Bytes) Register

1 Bus Master IDE Command (Primary)

1

2

1

4

4

Bus Master IDE Status (Primary)

Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer (Primary)

Bus Master IDE Command (Secondary)

Bus Master IDE Status (Secondary)

Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer (Secondary

SATA Connector

The 7-pin SATA connector is shown in the figure below.

Pin 1 Pin 7

Default Value

00h

00h

0000 0000h

00h

00h

0000 0000h

4

5

2

3

Pin

1

A

Figure 5-2. 7-Pin SATA Connector (on system board).

Table 5-6.

7-Pin SATA Connector Pinout

Description

Ground

TX positive

TX negative

Ground

RX negative

B

--

7

A

Pin

6

Description

RX positive

Ground

Holding clip

Holding clip

--

B

5-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

The diskette drive interface in these systems support one diskette drive connected to a standard

34-pin diskette drive connector. Selected models come standard with a 3.5-inch 1.44-MB diskette drive installed as drive A.

■

■

■

The diskette drive interface function is integrated into the LPC47B397 super I/O component. The internal logic of the I/O controller is software-compatible with standard 82077-type logic. The diskette drive controller has three operational phases in the following order:

Command phase—The controller receives the command from the system.

Execution phase—The controller carries out the command.

Results phase—Status and results data is read back from the controller to the system.

The Command phase consists of several bytes written in series from the CPU to the data register

(3F5h/375h). The first byte identifies the command and the remaining bytes define the parameters of the command. The Main Status register (3F4h/374h) provides data flow control for the diskette drive controller and must be polled between each byte transfer during the

Command phase.

The Execution phase starts as soon as the last byte of the Command phase is received. An

Execution phase may involve the transfer of data to and from the diskette drive, a mechnical control function of the drive, or an operation that remains internal to the diskette drive controller.

Data transfers (writes or reads) with the diskette drive controller are by DMA, using the DRQ2 and DACK2- signals for control.

The Results phase consists of the CPU reading a series of status bytes (from the data register

(3F5h/375h)) that indicate the results of the command. Note that some commands do not have a

Result phase, in which case the Execution phase can be followed by a Command phase.

During periods of inactivity, the diskette drive controller is in a non-operation mode known as the

Idle phase.

5.3.1 Diskette Drive Programming

Programming the diskette drive interface consists of configuration, which occurs typically during

POST, and control, which occurs at runtime.

Diskette Drive Interface Configuration

The diskette drive controller must be configured for a specific address and also must be enabled before it can be used. Address selection and enabling of the diskette drive interface are affected by firmware through the PnP configuration registers of the 47B397 I/O controller during POST.

The configuration registers are accessed through I/O registers 2Eh (index) and 2Fh (data) after the configuration phase has been activated by writing 55h to I/O port 2Eh. The diskette drive I/F is initiated by firmware selecting logical device 0 of the 47B397 using the following sequence:

1. Write 07h to I/O register 2Eh.

2. Write 00h to I/O register 2Fh (this selects the diskette drive I/F).

3. Write 30h to I/O register 2Eh.

4. Write 01h to I/O register 2Fh (this activates the interface).

Writing AAh to 2Eh deactivates the configuration phase. The diskette drive I/F configuration registers are listed in the following table:

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-7

Input/Output Interfaces

Table 5-7.

Diskette Drive Interface Configuration Registers

Index

Address

30h

60-61h

F2h

F4h

F5h

74h

F0h

F1h

Function

Activate

Base Address

DMA Channel Select

DD Mode

DD Option

DD Type

DD 0

DD 1

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Reset

Value

01h

03F0h

06h

02h

02h

00h

FFh

00h

00h

For detailed configuration register information refer to the SMSC data sheet for the LPC47B397

I/O component.

5-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

Diskette Drive Interface Control

The BIOS function INT 13 provides basic control of the diskette drive interface. The diskette drive interface can be controlled by software through the LPC47B397's I/O-mapped registers listed in Table 5-8. The diskette drive controller of the LPC47B397 operates in the PC/AT mode in these systems.

Table 5-8.

Diskette Drive Interface Control Registers

Primary

Address

Second.

Address Register

3F0h 370h

3F1h 371h

Status Register A:

<7> Interrupt pending

<6> Reserved (always 1)

<5> STEP pin status (active high)

<4> TRK 0 status (active high)

<3> HDSEL status (0 = side 0, 1 = side 1)

<2> INDEX status (active high)

<1> WR PRTK status (0 = disk is write protected)

<0> Direction (0 = outward, 1 = inward)

Status Register B:

<7,6> Reserved (always 1’s)

<5> DOR bit 0 status

<4> Write data toggle

<3> Read data toggle

<2> WGATE status (active high)

<1,0> MTR 2, 1 ON- status (active high)

3F2h

3F3h

372h

373h

Digital Output Register (DOR):

<7,6> Reserved

<5,4> Motor 1, 0 enable (active high)

<3> DMA enable (active high)

<2> Reset (active low)

<1,0> Drive select (00 = Drive 1, 01 = Drive 2, 10 = Reserved, 11 =

Tape drive)

Tape Drive Register (available for compatibility)

R/W

R

R

R/W

R/W

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-9

Input/Output Interfaces

Table 5-8. (Continued)

Diskette Drive Interface Control Registers

Primary

Address

Second.

Address Register

3F4h 374h

3F5h 375h

Main Status Register (MSR):

<7> Request for master (host can transfer data) (active high)

<6> Transfer direction (0 – write, 1 = read)

<5> non-DMA execution (active high)

<4> Command busy (active high)

<3,2> Reserved

<1,0> Drive 1, 2 busy (active high)

Data Rate Select Register (DRSR):

<7> Software reset (active high)

<6> Low power mode enable (active high)

<5> Reserved (0)

<4..2> Precompensation select (default = 000)

<1,0> Data rate select (00 = 500 Kb/s, 01 = 300 Kb/s, 10 = 250

Kb/s, 11 = 2/1 Mb/s)

Data Register:

<7..0> Data

3F6h

3F7h

376h

377h

Reserved

Digital Input Register (DIR):

<7> DSK CHG status (records opposite value of pin)

<6..0> Reserved (0’s)

Configuration Control Register (CCR):

<7..2> Reserved

<1,0> Data rate select (00 = 500 Kb/s, 01 = 300 Kb/s, 10 = 250

Kb/s, 11 = 2/1 Mb/s)

R/W

R

W

R/W

--

R

W

NOTE: The most recently written data rate value to either DRSR or CCR will be in effect.

5-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.3.2 Diskette Drive Connector

This system uses a standard 34-pin connector (refer to Figure 5-3 and Table 5-9 for the pinout) for diskette drives. Drive power is supplied through a separate connector.

2 4

1

6

5

8

7

10

9

12

11

14

13

16

15

18

17

20

19

22

21

24 26

23 25

28

27

30

29

32 34

31 33

Figure 5-3. 34-Pin Diskette Drive Connector.

Table 5-9.

34-Pin Diskette Drive Connector Pinout

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

16

17

6

7

4

5

2

3

Pin Signal

1 GND

LOW DEN-

---

MEDIA ID-

GND

DRV 4 SEL-

GND

Description

Ground

Low density select

(KEY)

Media identification

Ground

Drive 4 select

Ground

INDEX-

GND

Media index is detected 25

Ground 26

MTR 1 ONActivates drive motor

GND Ground

27

28

DRV 2 SEL-

GND

DRV 1 SEL-

GND

Drive 2 select

Ground

Drive 1 select

Ground

MTR 2 ONActivates drive motor

GND Ground

33

34

29

30

31

32

21

22

23

24

Pin

18

19

20

GND

TRK 00-

GND

WR PRTK-

GND

RD DATA-

GND

SIDE SEL-

GND

DSK CHG-

Signal

DIR-

GND

STEP-

GND

WR DATA-

GND

WR ENABLE-

Description

Drive head direction control

Ground

Drive head track step cntrl.

Ground

Write data

Ground

Enable for WR DATA-

Ground

Heads at track 00 indicator

Ground

Media write protect status

Ground

Data and clock read off disk

Ground

Head select (side 0 or 1)

Ground

Drive door opened indicator

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-11

Input/Output Interfaces

Systems covered in this guide may include one RS-232-C type serial interface to transmit and receive asynchronous serial data with external devices. Some systems may allow the installation of a second serial interface through an adapter that consists of a PCI bracket and a cable that attaches to header P52 on the system board. The serial interface function is provided by the

LPC47B397 I/O controller component that includes two NS16C550-compatible UARTs.

The UART supports the standard baud rates up through 115200, and also special high speed rates of 239400 and 460800 baud. The baud rate of the UART is typically set to match the capability of the connected device. While most baud rates may be set at runtime, baud rates 230400 and

460800 must be set during the configuration phase.

5.4.1 Serial Connector

The serial interface uses a DB-9 connector as shown in the following figure with the pinout listed in Table 5-10.

Figure 5-4. Serial Interface Connector (Male DB-9 as viewed from rear of chassis)

3

4

5

Pin Signal

1

2

CD

RX Data

TX Data

DTR

GND

Table 5-10.

DB-9 Serial Connector Pinout

Description

Carrier Detect

Receive Data

Transmit Data

Data Terminal Ready

Ground

8

9

--

Pin Signal

6

7

DSR

RTS

CTS

RI

--

Description

Data Set Ready

Request To Send

Clear To Send

Ring Indicator

--

The standard RS-232-C limitation of 50 feet (or less) of cable between the DTE (computer) and

DCE (modem) should be followed to minimize transmission errors. Higher baud rates may require shorter cables.

5.4.2 Serial Interface Programming

Programming the serial interfaces consists of configuration, which occurs during POST, and control, which occurs during runtime.

Serial Interface Configuration

The serial interface must be configured for a specific address range (COM1, COM2, etc.) and also must be activated before it can be used. Address selection and activation of the serial interface are affected through the PnP configuration registers of the LPC47B397 I/O controller.

5-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

The serial interface configuration registers are listed in the following table:

Table 5-11.

Serial Interface Configuration Registers

Index Address

30h

60h

61h

70h

F0h

Function

Activate

Base Address MSB

Base Address LSB

Interrupt Select

Mode Register

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Serial Interface Control

The BIOS function INT 14 provides basic control of the serial interface. The serial interface can be directly controlled by software through the I/O-mapped registers listed in Table 5-12.

Table 5-12.

Serial Interface Control Registers

COM1

Addr.

3F8h

COM2

Addr.

Register

2F8h Receive Data Buffer

Transmit Data Buffer

Baud Rate Divisor Register 0 (when bit 7 of Line Control Reg. Is set)

3F9h

3FAh

3FBh

3FCh

3FDh

3FEh

2F9h Baud Rate Divisor Register 1 (when bit 7 of Line Control Reg. Is set)

Interrupt Enable Register

2FAh Interrupt ID Register

FIFO Control Register

2FBh Line Control Register

2FCh Modem Control Register

2FDh Line Status Register

2FEh Modem Status

R/W

R

W

W

W

R/W

R

W

R/W

R/W

R

R

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-13

Input/Output Interfaces

■

■

■

Systems covered in this guide may include a parallel interface for connection to a peripheral device with a compatible interface, the most common being a printer. The parallel interface function is integrated into the LPC47B397 I/O controller component and provides bi-directional

8-bit parallel data transfers with a peripheral device. The parallel interface supports three main modes of operation:

Standard Parallel Port (SPP) mode

Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) mode

Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) mode

These three modes (and their submodes) provide complete support as specified for an IEEE 1284 parallel port.

5.5.1 Standard Parallel Port Mode

The Standard Parallel Port (SPP) mode uses software-based protocol and includes two sub-modes of operation, compatible and extended, both of which can provide data transfers up to

150 KB/s. In the compatible mode, CPU write data is simply presented on the eight data lines. A

CPU read of the parallel port yields the last data byte that was written.

The following steps define the standard procedure for communicating with a printing device:

1. The system checks the Printer Status register. If the Busy, Paper Out, or Printer Fault signals are indicated as being active, the system either waits for a status change or generates an error message.

2. The system sends a byte of data to the Printer Data register, then pulses the printer STROBE signal (through the Printer Control register) for at least 500 ns.

3. The system then monitors the Printer Status register for acknowledgment of the data byte before sending the next byte.

In extended mode, a direction control bit (CTR 37Ah, bit <5>) controls the latching of output data while allowing a CPU read to fetch data present on the data lines, thereby providing bi-directional parallel transfers to occur.

The SPP mode uses three registers for operation: the Data register (DTR), the Status register

(STR) and the Control register (CTR). Address decoding in SPP mode includes address lines A0 and A1.

5.5.2 Enhanced Parallel Port Mode

In Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) mode, increased data transfers are possible (up to 2 MB/s) due to a hardware protocol that provides automatic address and strobe generation. EPP revisions 1.7 and 1.9 are both supported. For the parallel interface to be initialized for EPP mode, a negotiation phase is entered to detect whether or not the connected peripheral is compatible with EPP mode.

If compatible, then EPP mode can be used. In EPP mode, system timing is closely coupled to

EPP timing. A watchdog timer is used to prevent system lockup.

Five additional registers are available in EPP mode to handle 16- and 32-bit CPU accesses with the parallel interface. Address decoding includes address lines A0, A1, and A2.

5-14 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.5.3 Extended Capabilities Port Mode

The Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) mode, like EPP, also uses a hardware protocol-based design that supports transfers up to 2 MB/s. Automatic generation of addresses and strobes as well as Run Length Encoding (RLE) decompression is supported by ECP mode. The ECP mode includes a bi-directional FIFO buffer that can be accessed by the CPU using DMA or programmed I/O. For the parallel interface to be initialized for ECP mode, a negotiation phase is entered to detect whether or not the connected peripheral is compatible with ECP mode. If compatible, then ECP mode can be used.

Ten control registers are available in ECP mode to handle transfer operations. In accessing the control registers, the base address is determined by address lines A2-A9, with lines A0, A1, and

A10 defining the offset address of the control register. Registers used for FIFO operations are accessed at their base address + 400h (i.e., if configured for LPT1, then 378h + 400h = 778h).

The ECP mode includes several sub-modes as determined by the Extended Control register. Two submodes of ECP allow the parallel port to be controlled by software. In these modes, the FIFO is cleared and not used, and DMA and RLE are inhibited.

5.5.4 Parallel Interface Programming

Programming the parallel interface consists of configuration, which typically occurs during

POST, and control, which occurs during runtime.

Parallel Interface Configuration

The parallel interface must be configured for a specific address range (LPT1, LPT2, etc.) and also must be enabled before it can be used. When configured for EPP or ECP mode, additional considerations must be taken into account. Address selection, enabling, and EPP/ECP mode parameters of the parallel interface are affected through the PnP configuration registers of the

LPC47B397 I/O controller. Address selection and enabling are automatically done by the BIOS during POST but can also be accomplished with the Setup utility and other software.

The parallel interface configuration registers are listed in the following table:

Table 5-13.

Parallel Interface Configuration Registers

Index

Address Function

30h

60h

Activate

Base Address MSB

61h

70h

74h

F0h

F1h

Base Address LSB

Interrupt Select

DMA Channel Select

Mode Register

Mode Register 2

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Reset Value

00h

00h

00h

00h

04h

00h

00h

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-15

Input/Output Interfaces

Parallel Interface Control

The BIOS function INT 17 provides simplified control of the parallel interface. Basic functions such as initialization, character printing, and printer status are provide by subfunctions of INT

17. The parallel interface is controllable by software through a set of I/O mapped registers. The number and type of registers available depends on the mode used (SPP, EPP, or ECP). Table 5-14 lists the parallel registers and associated functions based on mode.

I/O

Address

Table 5-14.

Parallel Interface Control Registers

Register

Base Data

Base + 1h Status

Base + 2h Control

Base + 3h

Base + 4h

Base + 5h

Base + 6h

Address

Data Port 0

Data Port 1

Data Port 2

Base + 7h Data Port 3

Base + 400h Parallel Data FIFO

Base + 400h ECP Data FIFO

Base + 400h Test FIFO

Base + 400h Configuration Register A

Base + 401h Configuration Register B

Base + 402h Extended Control Register

Base Address:

LPT1 = 378h

LPT2 = 278h

LPT3 = 3BCh

SPP

Mode

Ports

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

LPT1,2,3

LPT1,2,3

LPT1,2,3

--

--

--

--

EPP

Mode

Ports

--

--

--

LPT1,2

--

--

--

LPT1,2

LPT1,2

LPT1,2

LPT1,2

LPT1,2

LPT1,2

LPT1,2

ECP

Mode

Ports

--

LPT1,2,3

LPT1,2,3

LPT1,2,3

LPT1,2,3

LPT1,2,3

LPT1,2,3

LPT1,2,3

LPT1,2,3

LPT1,2,3

--

--

--

--

5-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.5.5 Parallel Interface Connector

Figure 5-5 and Table 5-15 show the connector and pinout of the parallel interface connector.

Note that some signals are redefined depending on the port's operational mode.

Figure 5-5. Parallel Interface Connector (Female DB-25 as viewed from rear of chassis)

Table 5-15.

DB-25 Parallel Connector Pinout

5

6

3

4

Pin Signal Function

1

2

STB-

D0

Strobe / Write [1]

Data 0

D1

D2

D3

D4

Data 1

Data 2

Data 3

Data 4

7

8

D5

D6

9 D7

10 ACK-

11 BSY

12 PE

13 SLCT

Data 5

Data 6

Data 7

Acknowledge / Interrupt [1]

Busy / Wait [1]

Paper End / User defined [1]

Select / User defined [1]

Pin Signal Function

14 LF-

15 ERR-

Line Feed [2]

Error [3]

16 INITInitialize Paper [4]

17 SLCTINSelect In / Address. Strobe [1]

18 GND

19 GND

Ground

Ground

24

25

--

20 GND

21 GND

22

23

GND

GND

GND

GND

--

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

--

NOTES:

[1] Standard and ECP mode function / EPP mode function

[2] EPP mode function: Data Strobe

ECP modes: Auto Feed or Host Acknowledge

[3] EPP mode: user defined

ECP modes:Fault or Peripheral Req.

[4] EPP mode: Reset

ECP modes: Initialize or Reverse Req.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-17

Input/Output Interfaces

5.6 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface

The keyboard/pointing device interface function is provided by the LPC47B397 I/O controller component, which integrates 8042-compatible keyboard controller logic (hereafter referred to as simply the “8042”) to communicate with the keyboard and pointing device using bi-directional serial data transfers. The 8042 handles scan code translation and password lock protection for the keyboard as well as communications with the pointing device. This section describes the interface itself. The keyboard is discussed in the Appendix C.

5.6.1 Keyboard Interface Operation

The data/clock link between the 8042 and the keyboard is uni-directional for Keyboard Mode 1 and bi-directional for Keyboard Modes 2 and 3. (These modes are discussed in detail in

Appendix C). This section describes Mode 2 (the default) mode of operation.

Communication between the keyboard and the 8042 consists of commands (originated by either the keyboard or the 8042) and scan codes from the keyboard. A command can request an action or indicate status. The keyboard interface uses IRQ1 to get the attention of the CPU.

The 8042 can send a command to the keyboard at any time. When the 8042 wants to send a command, the 8042 clamps the clock signal from the keyboard for a minimum of 60 us. If the keyboard is transmitting data at that time, the transmission is allowed to finish. When the 8042 is ready to transmit to the keyboard, the 8042 pulls the data line low, causing the keyboard to respond by pulling the clock line low as well, allowing the start bit to be clocked out of the 8042.

The data is then transferred serially, LSb first, to the keyboard (Figure 5-6). An odd parity bit is sent following the eighth data bit. After the parity bit is received, the keyboard pulls the data line low and clocks this condition to the 8042. When the keyboard receives the stop bit, the clock line is pulled low to inhibit the keyboard and allow it to process the data.

Data

Clock

Start

Bit

0

Th

D0

(LSb)

1

D1

0

Tcy

D2

1

D3

1

D4

0

D5

1

D6

1

Tcl Tch

Parameter Minimum Maximum

Tcy (Cycle Time) 0 us 80 us

Tcl (Clock Low) 25 us 35 us

Tch (Clock High) 25 us 45 us

Th (Data Hold) 0 us 25 us

Tss (Stop Bit Setup) 8 us 20 us

Tsh (Stop Bit Hold) 15 us 25 us

D7

(MSb)

1

Parity Stop

Bit

1 0

Tss Tsh

Figure 5-6. 8042-To-Keyboard Transmission of Code EDh, Timing Diagram

Control of the data and clock signals is shared by the 8042and the keyboard depending on the originator of the transferred data. Note that the clock signal is always generated by the keyboard.

After the keyboard receives a command from the 8042, the keyboard returns an ACK code. If a parity error or timeout occurs, a Resend command is sent to the 8042.

5-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

Table 5-16 lists and describes commands that can be issued by the 8042 to the keyboard.

Command

Set/Reset Status Indicators

Echo

Invalid Command

Select Alternate Scan Codes

Read ID

Set Typematic Rate/Display

Enable

Default Disable

Set Default

Set Keys—Typematic

Table 5-16.

8042-To-Keyboard Commands

Value

EDh

Description

Enables LED indicators. Value EDh is followed by an option byte that specifies the indicator as follows:

Bits <7..3> not used

Bit <2>, Caps Lock (0 = off, 1 = on)

Bit <1>, NUM Lock (0 = off, 1 = on)

Bit <0>, Scroll Lock (0 = off, 1 = on)

Keyboard returns EEh when previously enabled.

EEh

EFh/F1h These commands are not acknowledged.

F0h Instructs the keyboard to select another set of scan codes and sends an option byte after ACK is received:

01h = Mode 1

02h = Mode 2

03h = Mode 3

F2h Instructs the keyboard to stop scanning and return two keyboard ID bytes.

F3h

F4h

F5h

F6h

F7h

Instructs the keyboard to change typematic rate and delay to specified values:

Bit <7>, Reserved—0

Bits <6,5>, Delay Time

00 = 250 ms

01 = 500 ms

10 = 750 ms

11 = 1000 ms

Bits <4..0>, Transmission Rate:

00000 = 30.0 ms

00001 = 26.6 ms

00010 = 24.0 ms

00011 = 21.8 ms

:

11111 = 2.0 ms

Instructs keyboard to clear output buffer and last typematic key and begin key scanning.

Resets keyboard to power-on default state and halts scanning pending next 8042 command.

Resets keyboard to power-on default state and enable scanning.

Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-19

Input/Output Interfaces

Table 5-16. (Continued)

8042-To-Keyboard Commands

Command

Set Keys—Make/Brake

Value

F8h

Set Keys—Make

Set Keys—

Typematic/Make/Brake

Set Type Key—Typematic

F9h

FAh

Set Type Key—Make/Brake

Set Type Key—Make

Resend

Reset

FEh

FFh

Note: [1] Used in Mode 3 only.

FBh

FCh

FDh

Description

Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]

Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]

Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]

Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID. [1]

Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID. [1]

Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID. [1]

8042 detected error in keyboard transmission.

Resets program, runs keyboard BAT, defaults to Mode 2.

5.6.2 Pointing Device Interface Operating

The pointing device (typically a mouse) connects to a 6-pin DIN-type connector that is identical to the keyboard connector both physically and electrically. The operation of the interface (clock and data signal control) is the same as for the keyboard. The pointing device interface uses the

IRQ12 interrupt.

5.6.3 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface Programming

Programming the keyboard interface consists of configuration, which occurs during POST, and control, which occurs during runtime.

8042 Configuration

The keyboard/pointing device interface must be enabled and configured for a particular speed before it can be used. Enabling and speed parameters of the 8042 logic are affected through the

PnP configuration registers of the LPC47B397 I/O controller. Enabling and speed control are automatically set by the BIOS during POST but can also be accomplished with the Setup utility and other software.

5-20 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

The keyboard interface configuration registers are listed in the following table:

Table 5-17.

Keyboard Interface Configuration Registers

Index

Address Function

30h

70h

Activate

Primary Interrupt Select

72h

F0h

Secondary Interrupt Select

Reset and A20 Select

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

8042 Control

■

■

■

■

The BIOS function INT 16 is typically used for controlling interaction with the keyboard.

Sub-functions of INT 16 conduct the basic routines of handling keyboard data (i.e., translating the keyboard's scan codes into ASCII codes). The keyboard/pointing device interface is accessed by the CPU through I/O mapped ports 60h and 64h, which provide the following functions:

Output buffer reads

Input buffer writes

Status reads

Command writes

Ports 60h and 64h can be accessed using the IN instruction for a read and the OUT instruction for a write. Prior to reading data from port 60h, the “Output Buffer Full” status bit (64h, bit <0>) should be checked to ensure data is available. Likewise, before writing a command or data, the

“Input Buffer Empty” status bit (64h, bit <1>) should also be checked to ensure space is available.

I/O Port 60h

I/O port 60h is used for accessing the input and output buffers. This register is used to send and receive data from the keyboard and the pointing device. This register is also used to send the second byte of multi-byte commands to the 8042 and to receive responses from the 8042 for commands that require a response.

A read of 60h by the CPU yields the byte held in the output buffer. The output buffer holds data that has been received from the keyboard and is to be transferred to the system.

A CPU write to 60h places a data byte in the input byte buffer and sets the CMD/ DATA bit of the

Status register to DATA. The input buffer is used for transferring data from the system to the keyboard. All data written to this port by the CPU will be transferred to the keyboard except bytes that follow a multibyte command that was written to 64h

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-21

Input/Output Interfaces

I/O Port 64h

I/O port 64h is used for reading the status register and for writing commands. A read of 64h by the CPU will yield the status byte defined as follows:

Bit Function

7..4

General Purpose Flags.

3 CMD/DATA Flag (reflects the state of A2 during a CPU write).

0 = Data

1 = Command

2

1

0

General Purpose Flag.

Input Buffer Full. Set (to 1) upon a CPU write. Cleared by

IN A, DBB instruction.

Output Buffer Full (if set). Cleared by a CPU read of the buffer.

A CPU write to I/O port 64h places a command value into the input buffer and sets the

CMD/DATA bit of the status register (bit <3>) to CMD.

Table 5-18 lists the commands that can be sent tothe 8042 by the CPU. The 8042 uses IRQ1 for gaining the attention of the CPU.

Value

20h

60h

A4h

A5h

A6h

A7h

A8h

Table 5-18.

CPU Commands to the 8042

Command Description

Put current command byte in port 60h.

Load new command byte.

Test password installed. Tests whether or not a password is installed in the 8042:

If FAh is returned, password is installed.

If F1h is returned, no password is installed.

Load password. This multi-byte operation places a password in the 8042 using the following manner:

1. Write A5h to port 64h.

2. Write each character of the password in 9-bit scan code (translated) format to port 60h.

3. Write 00h to port 60h.

Enable security. This command places the 8042 in password lock mode following the A5h command. The correct password must then be entered before further communication with the

8042 is allowed.

Disable pointing device. This command sets bit <5> of the 8042 command byte, pulling the clock line of the pointing device interface low.

Enable pointing device. This command clears bit <5> of the 8042 command byte, activating the clock line of the pointing device interface.

5-22 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

Table 5-18. (Continued)

CPU Commands to the 8042

Value

A9h

AAh

ABh

ADh

AEh

C0h

C2h

Command Description

Test the clock and data lines of the pointing device interface and place test results in the output buffer.

00h = No error detected

01h = Clock line stuck low

02h = Clock line stuck high

03h = Data line stuck low

04h = Data line stuck high

Initialization. This command causes the 8042 to inhibit the keyboard and pointing device and places 55h into the output buffer.

Test the clock and data lines of the keyboard interface and place test results in the output buffer.

00h = No error detected

01h = Clock line stuck low

02h = Clock line stuck high

03h = Data line stuck low

04h = Data line stuck high

Disable keyboard command (sets bit <4> of the 8042 command byte).

Enable keyboard command (clears bit <4> of the 8042 command byte).

Read input port of the 8042. This command directs the 8042 to transfer the contents of the input port to the output buffer so that they can be read at port 60h.

Poll Input Port High. This command directs the 8042 to place bits <7..4> of the input port into the upper half of the status byte on a continous basis until another command is received.

C3h

D0h

Poll Input Port Low. This command directs the 8042 to place bits <3..0> of the input port into the lower half of the status byte on a continous basis until another command is received.

Read output port. This command directs the 8042 to transfer the contents of the output port to the output buffer so that they can be read at port 60h.

D1h Write output port. This command directs the 8042 to place the next byte written to port 60h into the output port (only bit <1> can be changed).

D2h

D3h

D4h

Echo keyboard data. Directs the 8042 to send back to the CPU the next byte written to port 60h as if it originated from the keyboard. No 11-to-9 bit translation takes place but an interrupt

(IRQ1) is generated if enabled.

Echo pointing device data. Directs the 8042 to send back to the CPU the next byte written to port

60h as if it originated from the pointing device. An interrupt (IRQ12) is generated if enabled.

Write to pointing device. Directs the 8042 to send the next byte written to 60h to the pointing device.

E0h Read test inputs. Directs the 8042 to transfer the test bits 1 and 0 into bits <1,0> of the output buffer.

F0h-FFh Pulse output port. Controls the pulsing of bits <3..0> of the output port (0 = pulse, 1 = don’t pulse). Note that pulsing bit <0> will reset the system.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-23

Input/Output Interfaces

5.6.4 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface Connector

The legacy-light model provides separate PS/2 connectors for the keyboard and pointing device.

Both connectors are identical both physically and electrically. Figure 5-7 and Table 5-19 show the connector and pinout of the keyboard/pointing device interface connectors.

Figure 5-7. PS/2 Keyboard or Pointing Device Interface Connector (as viewed from rear of chassis)

Pin Signal

1

2

3

DATA

NC

GND

Table 5-19.

Keyboard/Pointing Device Connector Pinout

Description

Data

Not Connected

Ground

Pin Signal

4

5

6

+ 5 VDC

CLK

NC

Description

Power

Clock

Not Connected

5-24 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.7 Universal Serial Bus Interface

The Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface provides asynchronous/isochronous data transfers with compatible peripherals such as keyboards, printers, or modems. This high-speed interface supports hot-plugging of compatible devices, making possible system configuration changes without powering down or even rebooting systems.

As shown in Figure 5-8, the USB interface is provided by the 82801 component. All systems provide as total of eight USB ports, two USB ports accessible at the front of the unit and six USB ports on the rear panel. The USB ports are dynamically configured to either a USB 1.1 controller or the USB 2.0 controller depending on the capability of the peripheral device. The 1.1 controllers provide a maximum transfer rate of 12 Mb/s while the 2.0 controller provides a maximum transfer rate of 480 Mb/s.

82801 ICH6

1.1 0

USB 1.1

Cntlr. #1

1.1 1

Data 0

Data 1

Rear Panel

USB Port 1

USB Port 2

1.1 2

USB 1.1

Cntlr. #2

1.1 3

Data 2

Data 3

USB Port 3

USB Port 4

1.1 4

USB 1.1

Cntlr. #3

1.1 5

Data 4

Data 5

USB Port 5

1.1 6

USB 1.1

Cntlr. #4

1.1 7

Data 6

USB Port 6

Front Panel

USB Port 7

Data 7

USB Port 8

USB 2.0

Cntlr.

2.0 0

2.0 1

2.0 2

2.0 3

2.0 4

2.0 5

2.0 6

2.0 7

Figure 5-8. USB I/F, Block Diagram

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-25

Input/Output Interfaces

5.7.1 USB Data Formats

■

■

■

■

■

The USB I/F uses non-return-to-zero inverted (NRZI) encoding for data transmissions, in which a 1 is represented by no change (between bit times) in signal level and a 0 is represented by a change in signal level. Bit stuffing is employed prior to NRZ1 encoding so that in the event a string of 1's is transmitted (normally resulting in a steady signal level) a 0 is inserted after every six consecutive 1's to ensure adequate signal transitions in the data stream. The USB transmissions consist of packets using one of four types of formats (Figure 5-9) that include two or more of seven field types.

■ Sync Field—8-bit field that starts every packet and is used by the receiver to align the incoming signal with the local clock.

■ Packet Identifier (PID) Field—8-bit field sent with every packet to identify the attributes (in. out, start-of-frame (SOF), setup, data, acknowledge, stall, preamble) and the degree of error correction to be applied.

Address Field—7-bit field that provides source information required in token packets.

Endpoint Field—4-bit field that provides destination information required in token packets.

Frame Field—11-bit field sent in Start-of-Frame (SOF) packets that are incremented by the host and sent only at the start of each frame.

Data Field—0-1023-byte field of data.

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Field—5- or 16-bit field used to check transmission integrity.

Token Packet

Sync Field

(8 bits)

SOF Packet

Sync Field

(8 bits)

Data Packet

Sync Field

(8 bits)

Handshake Packet

Sync Field

(8 bits)

PID Field

(8 bits)

PID Field

(8 bits)

PID Field

(8 bits)

PID Field

(8 bits)

Addr. Field

(7 bits)

ENDP. Field

(4 bits)

CRC Field

Frame Field

(11 bits)

Data Field

(0-1023 bytes)

CRC Field

(5 bits)

(5 bits)

CRC Field

(16 bits)

Figure 5-9. USB Packet Formats

Data is transferred LSb first. A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is applied to all packets (except a handshake packet). A packet causing a CRC error is generally completely ignored by the receiver.

5-26 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.7.2 USB Programming

Programming the USB interface consists of configuration, which typically occurs during POST, and control, which occurs at runtime.

USB Configuration

Each USB controller functions as a PCI device within the 82801 component and is configured using PCI Configuration Registers as listed in Table 5-20.

NOTE:

PCI Config.

Address

00, 01h

02, 03h

04, 05h

06, 07h

08h

09h

0Ah

0Bh

Note:

[1] USB 1.1 #1= 24D2h

USB 1.1 #2 = 24D4h

USB 1.1 #3 = 24D7h

USB 1.1 #4 = 24DDh

USB 2.0 = 24DDh

Register

Vendor ID

Device ID

PCI Command

PCI Status

Revision ID

Programming I/F

Sub Class Code

Base Class Code

Table 5-20.

USB Interface Configuration Registers

Reset

Value

PCI Config.

Address Register

8086h 0Eh Header Type

[1] 20-23h

0000h 2C, 2Dh

0280h 3Ch

00h 3Dh

I/O Space Base Address

Sub. Vender ID

Interrupt Line

Interrupt Pin

00h 60h

03h C0, C1h

0Ch C4h

Serial Bus Release No.

10h

USB Leg. Kybd./Ms. Cntrl.

2000h

USB Resume Enable 00h

Reset

Value

00h

1d

00h

00h

03h

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-27

Input/Output Interfaces

USB Control

The USB is controlled through I/O registers as listed in table 5-21.

Table 5-21.

USB Control Registers

I/O Address Register

00, 01h Command

02, 03h

04, 05h

Status

Interupt Enable

06, 07

08, 0B

0Ch

10, 11h

12, 13h

18h

Frame Number

Frame List Base Address

Start of Frame Modify

Port 1 Status/Control

Port 2 Status/Control

Test Data

Default Value

0000h

0000h

0000h

0000h

0000h

40h

0080h

0080h

00h

5.7.3 USB Connector

These systems provide type-A USB ports as shown in Figure 5-10 below.

1 2 3 4

Figure 5-10. Universal Serial Bus Connector (Female)

Pin Signal Description

Table 5-22.

USB Connector Pinout

Pin Signal Description

1 Vcc +5 VDC 3 USB+ Data (plus)

2 USBData (minus) 4 GND Ground

5-28 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.7.4 USB Cable Data

The recommended cable length between the host and the USB device should be no longer than sixteen feet for full-channel (12 MB/s) operation, depending on cable specification (see following table).

Conductor Size

20 AWG

22 AWG

24 AWG

26 AWG

28 AWG

Table 5-23.

USB Cable Length Data

Resistance

0.036 Ω

0.057 Ω

0.091 Ω

0.145 Ω

0.232 Ω

Maximum Length

16.4 ft (5.00 m)

9.94 ft (3.03 m)

6.82 ft (2.08 m)

4.30 ft (1.31 m)

2.66 ft (0.81 m)

NOTE:

For sub-channel (1.5 MB/s) operation and/or when using sub-standard cable shorter lengths may be allowable and/or necessary.

The shield, chassis ground, and power ground should be tied together at the host end but left unconnected at the device end to avoid ground loops.

Signal

Color code

Insulation color

Data +

Data -

Green

White

Vcc

Ground

Red

Black

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-29

Input/Output Interfaces

A block diagram of the audio subsystem is shown in Figure 5-11. These systems use the AC97

Audio Controller of the 82801 component to access and control an Analog Devices AD1981B

Audio Codec, which provides the analog-to-digital (ADC) and digital-to-analog (DAC) conversions as well as mixing and equalizer functions. All control functions such as volume, audio source selection, and sampling rate are controlled through software through the AC97

Audio Controller of the 82801 ICH component. Control data and digital audio streams (record and playback) are transferred between the Audio Controller and the Audio Codec over the AC97

Link Bus. The codec mono analog output is applied to a single-channel amplifier that drives the internal speaker. Plugging headphones into the Headphone jack results in an active Spkr Mute signal used by the codec to ,silence the internal speaker

The analog interfaces allowing connection to external audio devices include:

Mic In—This input uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack that is specifically designed for connection of a condenser microphone with an impedance of 10-K ohms. This is the default recording input after a system reset. On systems with both a front and rear microphone jack either jack is available for use (but not simultaneously).

Line In—This input uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack that is specifically designed for connection of a high-impedance (10k-ohm) audio source such as a tape deck.

Headphones Out—This input uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack that is designed for connecting a set of 16-ohm (nom.) stereo headphones or powered speakers. Plugging into the

Headphones jack mutes the signal to the internal speaker and the Line Out jack as well.

Line Out—This output uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack for connecting left and right channel line-level signals (20-K ohm impedance). A typical connection would be to a tape recorder's Line In (Record In) jacks, an amplifier's Line In jacks, or to powered speakers that contain amplifiers.

Line In

82801 ICH

PCI

Bus

AC’97

Audio

Cntlr.

PC Beep Audio

(L)

(R)

AUX In Header P11 [1]

Aux Audio (L)

Aux Audio (R)

Audio

Codec

AC97

Link Bus

Mono

Audio

Spkr Mute

HP Out Audio (L/R)

TDA

7056

P23

CD ROM Header P7 [2]

CD Audio (L)

CD Audio (R)

Mic In

Audio

Bias

P23

P6

(L)

(R)

+

-

Internal

Speaker

Headphones/

Line Out

Figure 5-11. Audio Subsystem Functional Block Diagram

5-30 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.8.1 AC97 Audio Controller

The AC97 Audio Controller is a PCI device that is integrated into the 82801 ICH component and supports the following functions:

■

■

■

■

■

■

Read/write access to audio codec registers

16-bit stereo PCM output @ up to 48 KHz sampling

16-bit stereo PCM input @ up to 48 KHz sampling

Acoustic echo correction for microphone

AC'97 Link Bus

ACPI power management

5.8.2 AC97 Link Bus

The audio controller and the audio codec communicate over a five-signal AC97 Link Bus (Figure

5-12). The AC97 Link Bus includes two serial data lines (SD OUT/SD IN) that transfer control and PCM audio data serially to and from the audio codec using a time-division multiplexed

(TDM) protocol. The data lines are qualified by a 12.288 MHz BIT_CLK signal driven by the audio codec. Data is transferred in frames synchronized by the 48-KHz SYNC signal, which is derived from the clock signal and driven by the audio controller. The SYNC signal is high during the frame's tag phase then falls during T17 and remains low during the data phase. A frame consists of one 16-bit tag slot followed by twelve 20-bit data slots. When asserted (typically during a power cycle), the RESET- signal (not shown) will reset all audio registers to their default values.

(12.288 MHz)

BIT_CLK

SYNC

(48 KHz)

T1 T2 T18 T19 T38 T39 T58

SD OUT or SD IN

Codec

Ready

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 0 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 0 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 0

Slot 0 (Tag) Slot 1 (Data) Slot 2 (Data)

Slot Description

0 Bit 15: Frame valid bit

Bits 14-3: Slots 1-12 valid bits

Bits 2-0: Codec ID

1 Command address: Bit 19, R/W; Bits 18..12, reg. Index; Bits 11..0, reserved.

Bit 19

3

4

Bits 19-4: PCM audio data, left channel (SD OUT, playback; SD IN, record)

Bits 3-0 all zeros

Bits 19-4: PCM audio data, right channel (SD OUT, playback; SD IN, record)

Bits 3-0 all zeros

5 Modem codec data (not used in this system)

6-11 Reserved

Figure 5-12. AC97 Link Bus Protocol

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-31

Input/Output Interfaces

5.8.3 Audio Codec

The audio codec provides pulse code modulation (PCM) coding and decoding of audio information as well as the selection and/or mixing of analog channels. As shown in Figure 5-13, analog audio from a microphone, tape, or CD can be selected and, if to be recorded (saved) onto a disk drive, routed through an analog-to-digital converter (ADC). The resulting left and right

PCM record data are muxed into a time-division-multiplexed (TDM) data stream (SD IN signal) that is routed to the audio controller. Playback (PB) audio takes the reverse path from the audio controller to the audio codec as SD OUT data and is decoded and either routed through an equalizer or applied directly to the digital-to-analog converter (DAC). The codec supports simultaneous record and playback of stereo (left and right) audio. The Sample Rate Generator may be set for sampling frequencies up to 48 KHz.

The integrated analog mixer provides the computer control-console functionality handling multiple audio inputs.

Mic In

Line In (L)

Line In (R)

CD In (L)

CD In (R)

SPDIF

Analog

Output

Circuits

HP Out L

HP Out R

S

E

L

(L)

(L)

(R)

(R)

Audio

Format

Σ/Mixer c t o r

S e l e

Left

Audio

Right

Audio

Rec

Gain

Rec

Gain

ADC

Rec

Data (L)

ADC

Rec

Data (R)

Sample

Rate

Gen.

PB

Gain

PB

Gain

DAC

PB

Data (L)

EQ

PB

Data (R)

DAC

EQ

AC97

Link

I/F

SD IN

SD Out

Audio

Controller

Figure 5-13. AD1981B Audio Codec Functional Block Diagram

All inputs and outputs are two-channel stereo except for the microphone input, which is inputted as a single-channel but mixed internally onto both left and right channels. The microphone input is the default active input. All block functions are controlled through index-addressed registers of the codec.

5-32 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.8.4 Audio Programming

Audio subsystem programming consists configuration, typically accomplished during POST, and control, which occurs during runtime.

Audio Configuration

The audio subsystem is configured according to PCI protocol through the AC97 audio controller function of the 82801 ICH. Table 5-24 lists the PCI configuration registers of the audio subsystem.

Table 5-24.

AC97 Audio Controller

PCI Configuration Registers (82801 Device 31/Function 5)

PCI Config.

Address Register

00-01h Vendor ID

02-03h

04-05h

06-07h

08h

09h

0Ah

0Bh

0Eh

10-13h

Device ID

PCI Command

PCI Status

Revision ID

Programming

Sub-Class

Base Class Code

Header Type

Native Audio Mixer

Base Addr.

Value on

Reset

PCI

Config.

Address

8086h 14-17h

24D5h 18-1Bh

0000h 1C-2Bh

0280h 2C-2Dh

XXh 2E-2Fh

00h

01h

04h

00h

1

30-3Bh

3Ch

3Dh

3E-FFh

--

Register

Native Audio Bus

Mstr. Addr.

Reserved

Reserved

Subsystem Vender ID

Subsystem ID

Reserved

Interrupt Line

Interrupt Pin

Reserved

--

Value on

Reset

1

1h

1h

0000h

0000h

--

00h

02h

0’s

--

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-33

Input/Output Interfaces

Audio Control

The audio subsystem is controlled through a set of indexed registers that physically reside in the audio codec . The register addresses are decoded by the audio controller and forwarded to the audio codec over the AC97 Link Bus previously described. The audio codec's control registers

(Table 5-25) are mapped into 64 kilobytes of variable I/O space.

Table 5-25.

AC97 Audio Codec Control Registers

Offset Address or

Register

00h Reset

Value

On

Reset

Offset Address or

Register

0100h 14h Video Vol.

02h Master Vol.

04h Reserved

8000h 16h Aux Vol.

-18h PCM Out Vol.

06h Mono Mstr. Vol.

8000h 1Ah Record Sel.

08h Reserved -1Ch Record Gain

0Ah PC Beep Vol.

0Ch Phone In Vol.

0Eh Mic Vol.

10h Line In Vol.

12h CD Vol.

8000h 1Eh Reserved

8008h 20h Gen. Purpose

8008h 22h 3D Control

8808h 24h Reserved

8808h 26h Pwr Mgnt.

Value

On

Reset

Offset Address or

Register

8808h 28h Ext. Audio ID.

Value

On

Reset

0001h

8808h 2Ah Ext. Audio Ctrl/Sts 0000h

8808h 2Ch PCM DAC SRate BB80h

0000h 32h PCM ADC SRate

8000h 34h Reserved

BB80h

--

-72h Reserved

0000h 74h Serial Config.

0000h 76h Misc. Control Bits

-7Ch Vender ID1

000xh 7Eh Vender ID2

--

7x0xh

0404h

4144h

5340h

5-34 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.8.5 Audio Specifications

The specifications for the integrated AC97 audio subsystem are listed in Table 5-26.

Table 5-26.

AC97 Audio Subsystem Specifications

Parameter

Sampling Rate

Resolution

Nominal Input Voltage:

Mic In (w/+20 db gain)

Line In

Impedance:

Mic In

Line In

Line Out

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (input to Line Out)

Frequency Response (-3db to Line Output):

Line Input

Mic Input

A/D (PC record)

Line input

Mic input

D/A (PC playback)

Max. Power Output (with 10% THD):

Small Form Factor

Slim Desktop/Configurable Minitower

Input Gain Attenuation Range

Master Volume Range

Frequency Response:

Codec

Speaker (Small Form Factor)

Measurement

7040 KHz to 48 KHz

16 bit

.283 Vp-p

2.83 Vp-p

1 K ohms (nom)

10 K ohms (min)

800 ohms

90 db (nom)

20 Hz – 20 KHz

100 Hz – 12 KHz

20 Hz – 19.2 KHz

100 Hz – 8.8 Khz

20 Hz – 19.2 KHz

8 watts (into 8 ohms)

3 watts (into 16 ohms)

-46.5 db

-94.5 db

20–20 KHz

450–4000 Hz

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-35

Input/Output Interfaces

5-36

These systems provide 10/100/1000 Mbps network support through a Broadcom BCM5751 network interface controller (NIC), a PHY component, and a RJ-45 jack with integral status

LEDs. The 82562-equivalent controller integrated into the 82801 ICH component is not used

(disabled) in these systems. (Figure 5-14). The support firmware for the BCM5782 component is contained in the system (BIOS) ROM. The NIC can operate in half- or full-duplex modes, and provides auto-negotiation of both mode and speed. Half-duplex operation features an

Intel-proprietary collision reduction mechanism while full-duplex operation follows the IEEE

802.3x flow control specification.

Green LED

RJ-45

Connector

Broadcom

BCM5751

NIC

Tx/Rx Data

LAN I/F

Tx/Rx Data

Yellow LED

LED

Green

Yellow

Function

Activity/Li nk. Indicates network activity and link pulse reception.

Speed. Indicates link detection 100Mb/s mode.

■

■

■

Figure 5 14. Network Interface Controller Block Diagram

■

■

■

The Network Interface Controller includes the following features:

Dual high speed RISC controllers with 16-KB caches.

Triple-mode support with auto-switching between 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and

1000BASE-T.

Power management support for ACPI 1.1, PXE 2.0, WOL, ASF 1.0, IPMI

Cable testing capability

Link and Activity LED indicator drivers

The controller features high and low priority queues and provides priority-packet processing for networks that can support that feature. The controller's micro-machine processes transmit and receive frames independently and concurrently. Receive runt (under-sized) frames are not passed on as faulty data but discarded by the controller, which also directly handles such errors as collision detection or data under-run.

The NIC uses 3.3 VDC auxiliary power, which allows the controller to support Wake-On-LAN

(WOL) and Alert-On-LAN (AOL) functions while the main system is powered down.

✎

For the features in the following paragraphs to function as described, the system unit must be plugged into a live AC outlet. Controlling unit power through a switchable power strip will, with the strip turned off, disable any wake, alert, or power mangement functionality.

361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.9.1 Wake-On-LAN Support

The NIC supports the Wired-for-Management (WfM) standard of Wake-On-LAN (WOL) that allows the system to be booted up from a powered-down or low-power condition upon the detection of special packets received over a network. The NIC receives 3.3 VDC auxiliary power while the system unit is powered down in order to process special packets. The detection of a

Magic Packet by the NIC results in the PME- signal on the PCI bus to be asserted, initiating system wake-up from an ACPI S1 or S3 state.

5.9.2 Alert Standard Format Support

■

■

■

Alert Standard Format (ASF) support allows the NIC to communicate the occurrence of certain events over a network to an ASF 1.0-compliant management console and, if necessary, take action that may be required. The ASF communications can involve the following:

Alert messages sent by the client to the management console.

Maintenance requests sent by the management console to the client.

Description of client's ASF capabilities and characteristics.

The activation of ASF functionality requires minimal intervention of the user, typically requiring only booting a client system that is connected to a network with an ASF-compliant management console.

5.9.3 Power Management Support

The NIC features Wired-for-Management (WfM) support providing system wake up from network events (WOL) as well as generating system status messages (AOL) and supports ACPI power management environments. The controller receives 3.3 VDC (auxiliary) power as long as the system is plugged into a live AC receptacle, allowing support of wake-up events occurring over a network while the system is powered down or in a low-power state.

The Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) functionality of system wake up is implemented through an ACPI-compliant OS and is the default power management mode. The following wakeup events may be individually enabled/disabled through the supplied software driver:

■ Magic Packet—Packet with node address repeated 16 times in data portion

✎

The following functions are supported in NDIS5 drivers but implemented through remote management software applications (such as LanDesk).

■

■

■

■

Individual address match—Packet with matching user-defined byte mask

Multicast address match—Packet with matching user-defined sample frame

ARP (address resolution protocol) packet

Flexible packet filtering—Packets that match defined CRC signature

The PROSet Application software (pre-installed and accessed through the System Tray or

Windows Control Panel) allows configuration of operational parameters such as WOL and duplex mode.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-37

Input/Output Interfaces

5.9.4 NIC Programming

Programming the NIC consists of configuration, which occurs during POST, and control, which occurs at runtime. The Broadcom BCM5782 is configured as a PCI device and controlled through registers mapped in variable I/O space. The BIOS for the BCM5782 is contained within the HP/Compaq BIOS in system ROM. Refer to Broadcom documentation for details regarding

BCM5782 register programming.

5.9.5 NIC Connector

Figure 5-14 shows the RJ-45 connector used for the NIC interface. This connector includes the two status LEDs as part of the connector assembly.

Speed LED Activity LED

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Pin Description

1 Transmit+

2 Transmit-

3 Receive+

6 Receive-

4, 7, 8 Not used

Figure 5 15. Ethernet TPE Connector (RJ-45, viewed from card edge)

5-38 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Input/Output Interfaces

5.9.6 NIC Specifications

Parameter

Modes Supported

Standards Compliance

OS Driver Support

Boot ROM Support

F12 BIOS Support

Bus Inteface

Power Management Support

Table 5-27.

NIC Specifications

10BASE-T half duplex @ 10 Mb/s

10Base-T full duplex @ 20 Mb/s

100BASE-TX half duplex @ 100 Mb/s

100Base-TX full duplex @ 200 Mb/s

1000BASE-T half duplex @ 1 Gb/s

1000BASE-TX full duplex @ 2 Gb/s

IEEE 802.2

IEEE 802.3 & 802.3x

IEEE Intel priority packet (801.1p)

MS-DOS

MS Windows 3.1

MS Windows 95 (pre-OSR2), 98, and 2000

Professional, XP Home, XP Pro

MS Windows NT 3.51 & 4.0

Novell Netware 3.x, 4.x, 5x

Novell Netware/IntraNetWare

SCO UnixWare 7

Linux 2.2, 2.4

PXE 2.0

Intel PRO/100 Boot Agent (PXE 3.0, RPL)

Yes

PCI 2.2

ACPI, PCI Power Management Spec.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-39

Input/Output Interfaces

5-40 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

6

Integrated Graphics Subsystem

6.1 Introduction

This chapter describes graphics subsystem that is integrated into the 82915G/GV GMCH component. This graphics subsystem employs the use of system memory to provide efficient, economical 2D and 3D performance.

The SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors may be upgraded by installing a graphics card into the

PCI Express x16 or the PCI 2.3 slot. The USDT form factor may be upgraded by installing graphics card into the PCI 2.3 slot. An installed PCI Express or PCI 2.3 graphics controller card will be detected by the BIOS during the boot sequence and the integrated graphics controller of the 82915G GMCH will then be disabled (refer to section 6.5 for more information on upgrading the graphics subsystem).

This chapter covers the following subjects:

■

■

■

■

Functional description (6.2), page 6-2

Display Modes (6.3), page 6-5

Upgrading graphics (6.4) , page 6-5

VGA Monitor connector (6.5), page 6-6

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 6-1

Integrated Graphics Subsystem

The Intel 915G/GV GMCH component includes an integrated graphics controller (IGC). (Figure

6-1). The IGC can directly drive an external, analog multi-scan monitor at resolutions up to and including 2048 x 1536 pixels. The IGC includes a memory management feature that allocates portions of system memory for use as the frame buffer and for storing textures and 3D effects.

The IGC provides two SDVO channels that are multiplexed through the PCI Express graphics interface. These SDVO ports may be used by an Advanced Digital Display (ADD2) card installed in the PCI Express graphics slot in driving two digital displays with a 200-megapixel clock.

The SSF, ST, MT, and CMT sytems may be upgraded by installing a separate PCI-E graphics card in the PCI Express x16 slot, which disables the onboard IGC. All systems may be also be upgraded by installing a PCI graphics card in teh PCI 2.3 slot.

82915G/GV GMCH

Monitor

RGB

Integrated

Graphics

Controller

PCI Express x16

Graphics slot [1]

PCI-E

& SDVO Data

PCI Expr. I/F [2]

SDRAM

Controller

DDR

SDRAM

(System

Memory)

NOTE:

[1] SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors only

[2] 82915G GMCH only

Figure 6-1. 915G-Based Graphics, Block diagram

The Integrated Graphics Controller provides the following functions:

■ Rapid pixel and texel rendering using special pipelines that allow 2D and 3D operations to overlap, speeding up visual effects, reducing the amount of memory for texture storage.

■ Zone rendering for optimizing 3D drawing, eliminating the need for local graphics memory by reducing the bandwidth.

■ Dynamic video memory allocation, where the amount of memory required by the application is acquired (or released) by the controller.

■ Intelligent memory management allowing tiled memory addressing, deep display buffering, and dynamic data management.

■ Provides two serial digital video out (SDVO) channels for use by an appropriate ADD2 accessory card.

6-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Integrated Graphics Subsystem

■

■

The graphics controller integrated into the 82915G/GV GMCH component includes 2D and 3D accelerator engines working with a deeply-pipelined pre-processor. Hardware cursor and overlay generators are also included as well as a legacy VGA processor core. The IGC supports three display devices:

One progressive-scan analog monitor

Up to two additional video displays with the installation of an optional Advanced Digital

Display (ADD2) card in the PCI Express x16 graphics slot.

✎

The IGC can support LVDS, TMDS, or TV output with the proper encoder option.

Special features of the integrated graphics controller include:

■

■

■

■

■

333-MHz core engine

400-MHz 24-bit RAMDAC

2D engine supporting GDI+, alpha stretch blithering, and color space conversion

3D engine supporting Z-bias and up to 1600 x 1200 w/32-bit color @ 85 hz refresh

Video DVD support:

The Intel graphics controller uses a portion of system memory for instructions, textures, and frame (display) buffering. Using a process called Dynamic Video Memory Technology (DVMT), the controller dynamically allocates display and texture memory amounts according to the needs of the application running on the system.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 6-3

Integrated Graphics Subsystem

6.2.1 Video Memory Allocation Reporting

The IGC does not have local memory at its disposal but instead uses a portion of system memory allocated for frame buffering and texturing. The total memory allocation is determined by the amount of system memory installed in a system. The video BIOS pre-allocates 8 megabytes of memory during POST. System memory that is pre-allocated is not seen by the operating system, which will report the total amount of memory installed less the amount of pre-allocated memory.

Example: A system with 128 MB of SDRAM with the video BIOS set to 8 MB will be reported by MS Windows as having 120 MB.

The IGC will use, in standard VGA/SVGA modes, pre-allocated memory as a true dedicated frame buffer. If the system boots with the OS loading the IGC Extreme Graphics drivers, the pre-allocated memory will then be re-claimed by the drivers and may or may not be used by the

IGC in the “extended” graphic modes. However, it is important to note that pre-allocated memory is available only to the IGC, not to the OS.

The 915G's DVMT function is an enhancement over the Unified Memory Architecture (UMA) of earlier copyists. The DVMT of the 915G selects, during the boot process, the maximum graphics memory allocation possible according on the amount of system memory installed:

SDRAM Installed

128 to 256 megabytes

257 to 511 megabytes

> 512megabytes

Maximum Memory Allocation

8-32 MB

8-64 MB

8-128 MB

The actual amount of system memory used by the IGC (in the “extended” or “extreme” modes) will increase and decrease dynamically according to the needs of the graphics application. The amount of memory used solely for graphics (video) may be reported in a message on the screen, depending on the operating system and/or applications running on the machine.

For viewing the maximum amount of available frame buffer memory MS Windows 2000 or XP, go to Display Properties > Settings> Adapter.

The Microsoft Direct diagnostic tool included in most versions of Windows may be used to check the amount of video memory being used. The Display tab of the utility the “Approx. Total

Memory” label will indicate the amount of video memory. The value will vary according to OS

(Windows 98 will typically show 0.5 to 5 MB or higher, depending on screen resolution and application. In Windows 2000 or XP, the video memory size reported by DirectX will always be

32 MB, even if the total memory installed is over 128 MB.

✎

Some applications, particularly games that require advanced 3D hardware acceleration, may not install or run correectly on systems using the IGC.

6-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Integrated Graphics Subsystem

■

■

■

The IGC supports most standard display modes for 2D video displays up to and including 2048 x

1536 @ 85 Hz , and 3D display modes up to 1600 x 1200 @ 85 Hz. The highest resolution available will be determined by the following factors:

Memory speed and amount

Single or dual channel memory

Number and type of monitors

✎

The IGC is designed for optimum performance with multi-sync analog monitors.

Digital displays may not provide an image as high in quality, depending on resolution.

The IGC of SFF, ST, MT, and CMT systems is upgradeable by installing an Advanced Digital

Display 2 (ADD2) or a graphics controller card into the PCI Express x16 graphics slot. All systems can be upgraded by installing a PCI card in the PCI 2.3 slot (assuming no riser cards are installed). Depending on accessory, upgrading through the PCI Express x16 slot can provide digital monitor support and/or dual-monitor support allowing display-cloning or extended desktop functionality. Software drivers may need to be downloaded for specific cards.

✎

Two SDVO channels are provided by the IGC for supporting two digital displays. Existing option cards and drivers support one CRT and digital display. Dual digital display support may be possible with future cards and drivers.

The upgrade procedure is as follows:

1. Shut down the system through the operating system.

2. Unplug the power cord from the rear of the system unit.

3. Remove the chassis cover.

4. Install the graphics card into the PCI Express x16 graphics or PCI 2.3 slot.

5. Replace the chassis cover.

6. Reconnect the power cord to the system unit.

7. Power up the system unit.

The BIOS will detect the presence of the PCI card and disable the IGC of the 82915G GMCH.

✎

.If a PCI 2.3 graphics card is installed, the IGC can be re-enabled through the Setup Utility (F10) but may require driver installation. If a PCI-E graphics controller card is installed, the IGC cannot be enabled.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 6-5

Integrated Graphics Subsystem

These systems includes a standard VGA connector (Figure 6-3) for attaching an analog monitor:

9

Figure 6 3. VGA Monitor Connector, (Female DB-15, as viewed from rear).

5

6

3

4

7

8

Pin Signal

1

2

R

G

B

NC

GND

R GND

G GND

B GND

Table 6-1.

DB-15 Monitor Connector Pinout

Description

Red Analog

Blue Analog

Green Analog

Not Connected

Ground

Red Analog Ground

Blue Analog Ground

Green Analog Ground

Pin

9

15

--

Signal

PWR

10 GND

11 NC

12 SDA

13 HSync

14 VSync

SCL

--

NOTES:

[1] Fuse automatically resets when excessive load is removed.

Description

+5 VDC (fused) [1]

Ground

Not Connected

DDC2-B Data

Horizontal Sync

Vertical Sync

DDC2-B Clock

--

6-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

7

Power and Signal Distribution

7.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the power supply and method of general power and signal distribution.

Topics covered in this chapter include:

■

■

■

Power supply assembly/control (7.2), page 7-1

Power distribution (7.3), page 7-8

Signal distribution (7.4), page 7-13

7.2 Power Supply Assembly/Control

These systems feature a power supply assembly that is controlled through programmable logic

(Figure 7-1).

System Board

Front Bezel

Power Button

Power On

CPU, slots, Chipsets, Logic,

& Voltage Regulators

PS On

Fan

Spd

+3.3 VDC +5 VDC +12 VDC +12 VccP -12 VDC

+3.3 VDC

+5 VDC

+12 VDC

110 VAC

AC Select [1]

220 VAC

NOTE:

[1] 300-watt power supply only.

Power Supply

Assembly

Figure 7-1. Power Distribution and Control, Block Diagram

Drives

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-1

Power and Signal Distribution

7.2.1 Power Supply Assembly

These systems feature power supplies with power factor-correction logic. Four power supplies are used: a 200-watt power supply for the USDT unit, a 240-watt power supply for the SFF and

ST units, a 300-watt power supply for the MT unit, and a 340-watt power supply for the CMT unit. All power supplies except that for the MT feature active power factor correction (PFC) and auto-ranging. The 300-watt power supply uses passive PFC and an AC select switch. Tables 7-1 through 7-4 list the specifications of the power supplies. Note that output load voltages are measured at the load-side of the output connectors.

Table 7-1.

200-Watt (USDT) Power Supply Assembly Specifications

Range or

Tolerance

Input Line Voltage:

115–230 VAC (auto-ranging) 90–264 VAC

Line Frequency

Input (AC) Current

+3.33 VDC Output

+5.08 VDC Output

47–63 Hz

--

+ 4 %

+ 3.3 %

+5.08 AUX Output

+12 VDC Output [3]

-12 VDC Output

+ 3.3 %

+ 5 %

+ 10 %

Min.

Current

Loading [1]

--

--

--

0.1 A

0.3 A

0.0 A

0.1 A

0.0 A

Max.

Current

--

--

4.0 A

12.0 A

10.0 A

2.0 A

15.5 A

0.15 A

Surge

Current [2]

--

--

--

12.0 A

10.0 A

2.0 A

18.0 A

0.15 A

Max.

Ripple

--

--

--

50 mV

50 mV

50 mV

120 mV

200 mV

NOTES:

Total continuous power should not exceed 200 watts. Total surge power (<10 seconds w/duty cycle < 5 %) should not exceed

230 watts.

[1] Minimum loading requirements must be met at all times to ensure normal operation and specification compliance.

[2] Surge duration no longer than 10 seconds with 12-volt tolerance at +/- 10%.

[3] +12 VDC output can be split by the system board to +12 VDC (@ 3 A) and +12 Vcpu (@ 12.5 A) power planes.

Table 7-2.

240-Watt (SFF/ST) Power Supply Assembly Specifications

Range/

Tolerance

Input Line Voltage:

115–230 VAC (auto-ranging) 90–264 VAC

Line Frequency 47–63 Hz

Input (AC) Current

+3.3 VDC Output

+5.08 VDC Output

+5.08 AUX Output

--

+ 4%

+ 3.3 %

+ 3.3 %

+12 VDC Output

+12 VDC Output (Vcpu)

--12 VDC Output

+ 5 %

+ 5 %

+ 10 %

Min.

Current

Loading [1]

--

--

--

0.1 A

0.3 A

0.0 A

0.1 A

0.1 A

0.0 A

Max.

Current

--

--

5.0 A

19.0 A

14.0 A

3.0 A

7.5 A

12.5 A

0.15 A

Surge

Current [2]

--

--

--

19.0 A

14.0 A

3.0 A

9.0 A

12.5 A

0.15 A

Max.

Ripple

--

--

--

50 mV

50 mV

50 mV

120 mV

120 mv

200 mV

NOTES:

Total continuous power should not exceed 240 watts. Total surge power (<10 seconds w/duty cycle < 5 %) should not exceed

260 watts.

[1] The minimum current loading figures apply to a PS On start up only.

7-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Power and Signal Distribution

Table 7-3.

300-Watt (MT) Power Supply Assembly Specifications

Range/

Tolerance

Min.

Current

Loading [1]

Max.

Current

Surge

Current [2]

Input Line Voltage:

115 VAC Setting

230 VAC Setting

Line Frequency

Constant Input (AC) Current

+3.3 VDC Output

+5 VDC Output

+5 AUX Output

+12 VDC Output

+12 VDC Output (Vcpu)

--12 VDC Output

90 - 132 VAC

180 - 264 VAC

47–63 Hz

--

+ 5%

+ 5%

+ 5%

+ 5 %

+ 5 %

+ 10 %

--

--

--

0.1 A

0.3 A

0.0 A

0.1 A

0.1 A

0.0 A

--

--

8.0 / 4.0A

18.0 A

25.0 A

2.0 A

6.5 A

12.5 A

0.8 A

--

--

--

19.0 A

25.0 A

2.0 A

6.5 A

12.5 A

0.8 A

Max.

Ripple

--

--

--

50 mV

50 mV

50 mV

120 mV

120 mv

200 mV

NOTES:

Total continuous power should not exceed 300 watts. Total continuous power (excluding 5 V aux output) should not exceed 290 watts

[1] Minimum loading requirements must be met at all times to ensure normal operation and specification compliance.

[2] Surge duration no longer than 10 seconds with 12-volt tolerance +/- 10%.

Table 7-4 lists the specifications for the 340-watt power supply used in the CMT form factor and in some MT form factors.

Table 7-4.

340-Watt (MT/CMT) Power Supply Assembly Specifications

Range or

Tolerance

Input Line Voltage:

115–230 VAC (auto-ranging) 90–132 VAC

Line Frequency 47–63 Hz

Input (AC) Current

+3.3 VDC Output

+5.08 VDC Output

--

+ 4 %

+ 3.3 %

+5.08 AUX Output

+12 VDC Output

+12 VDC Output (Vcpu)

-12 VDC Output

+ 3.3 %

+ 5 %

+ 5 %

+ 10 %

Min.

Current

Loading [1]

--

--

--

0.10 A

0.30 A

0.00 A

0.20 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

Max.

Current

--

--

6.0 A

24.0 A

19.0 A

3.00 A

12.0 A

12.5 A

0.15 A

Surge

Current [2]

--

--

--

24.0 A

19.0 A

3.00 A

14.5 A

12.5 A

0.15 A

Max.

Ripple

NOTES:

Total continuous output power should no exceed 340 watts. Maximum surge power should not exceed 360 watts. Total continuous power (excluding 5 V aux output) should not exceed 325watts.

Maximum combined power of +5 and +3.3 VDC is 160 watts.

[1] Minimum loading requirements must be met at all times to ensure normal operation and specification compliance.

[2] Surge duration no longer than 10 seconds with 12-volt tolerance +/- 10%.

--

--

--

50 mV

50 mV

50 mV

120 mV

200 mv

200 mV

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-3

Power and Signal Distribution

7.2.2 Power Control

The power supply assembly is controlled digitally by the PS On signal (Figure 7-1). When PS On is asserted, the Power Supply Assembly is activated and all voltage outputs are produced. When

PS On is de-asserted, the Power Supply Assembly is off and no voltages (except +5 AUX) are generated. Note that the +5 AUX voltages are always produced as long as the system is connected to a live AC source.

Power Button

The PS On signal is typically controlled through the Power Button which, when pressed and released, applies a negative (grounding) pulse to the power control logic. The resultant action of pressing the power button depends on the state and mode of the system at that time and is described as follows:

System State

Off

On, ACPI Disabled

On, ACPI Enabled

Pressed Power Button Results In:

Negative pulse, of which the falling edge results in power control logic asserting PS On signal to Power Supply Assembly, which then initializes. ACPI four-second counter is not active.

Negative pulse, of which the falling edge causes power control logic to de-assert the PS On signal. ACPI four-second counter is not active.

Pressed and Released Under Four Seconds:

Negative pulse, of which the falling edge causes power control logic to generate SMI-, set a bit in the SMI source register, set a bit for button status, and start four-second counter. Software should clear the button status bit within four seconds and the Suspend state is entered. If the status bit is not cleared by software in four seconds PS On is de-asserted and the power supply assembly shuts down (this operation is meant as a guard if the OS is hung).

Pressed and Held At least Four Seconds Before Release:

If the button is held in for at least four seconds and then released, PS On is negated, de-activating the power supply.

7-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Power and Signal Distribution

Power LED Indications

A dual-color LED located on the front panel (bezel) is used to indicate system power status. The front panel (bezel) power LED provides a visual indication of key system conditions listed as follows:

Power LED

Steady green

Blinks green @ 0.5 Hz

Blinks red 2 times @ 1 Hz [1]

Blinks red 3 times @ 1 Hz [1]

Bli nks red 4 times @ 1 Hz [1]

Blinks red 5 times @ 1 Hz [1]

Blinks red 6 times @ 1 Hz [1]

Blinks red 7 times @ 1 Hz [1]

Blinks red 8 times @ 1 Hz [1]

Blinks red 9 times @ 1 Hz [1]

Blinks red 10 times @ 1 Hz [1]

No light

Condition

Normal full-on operation

Suspend state (S1) or suspend to RAM (S3)

Processor thermal shut down. Check air flow, fan operation, and CPU heat sink.

Processor not installed. Install or reseat CPU.

Power failure (power supply is overloaded). Check voltage selector (if applicable), stroage devices, expansion cards and/or system board.

Pre-video memory error. Incompatible or incorrectly seated

DIMM.

Pre-video graphics error. On system with integrated graphics, check/replace system board. On system with graphics card, check/replace graphics card.

PCA failure. Check/replace system board.

Invalid ROM (checksum error). Reflash ROM using

ROMPaq diskette or replace system board.

System powers on but fails to boot. Check power supply,

CPU, system board.

Bad option card.

System dead. Press and hold power button for less than 4 seconds. If HD LED turns green then check voltage select switch setting or expansion cards. If no LED light then check power button/power supply cables to system board or system board.

NOTE:

[1] Will be accompanied by the same number of beeps, with 2-second pause between cycles. Beeps stop after 5 cycles.

Wake Up Events

The PS On signal can be activated with a power “wake-up” of the system due to the occurrence of a magic packet, serial port ring, or PCI power management (PME) event. These events can be individually enabled through the Setup utility to wake up the system from a sleep (low power) state.

✎

Wake-up functionality requires that certain circuits receive auxiliary power while the system is turned off. The system unit must be plugged into a live AC outlet for wake up events to function.

Using an AC power strip to control system unit power will disable wake-up event functionality.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-5

Power and Signal Distribution

The wake up sequence for each event occurs as follows:

Wake-On-LAN

The network interface controller (NIC) can be configured for detection of a “Magic Packet” and wake the system up from sleep mode through the assertion of the PME- signal on the PCI bus.

Refer to Chapter 5, “Network Support” for more information.

Modem Ring

A ring condition on a serial port can be detected by the power control logic and, if so configured, cause the PS On signal to be asserted.

Power Management Event

A power management event that asserts the PME- signal on the PCI bus can be enabled to cause the power control logic to generate the PS On. Note that the PCI card must be PCI ver. 2.2 compliant to support this function.

7-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Power and Signal Distribution

7.2.3 Power Management

■

■

■

These systems include power management functions designed to conserve energy. These functions are provided by a combination of hardware, firmware (BIOS) and software. The system provides the following power management features:

ACPI v1.0b compliant (ACPI modes C1, C2, S1, and S3, )

APM 1.2 compliant

U.S. EPA Energy Star compliant

Table 7-5 shows the comparison in power states.

Table 7-5.

System Power States

Power

State System Condition

G0, S0, D0 System fully on. OS and application is running, all components.

G1, S1, C1, D1 System on, CPU is executing and data is held in memory. Some peripheral subsystems may be on low power. Monitor is blanked.

G1, S2/3, C2,

D2 (Standby/or suspend)

G1, S4, D3

(Hibernation)

System on, CPU not executing, cache data lost. Memory is holding data, display and I/O subsystems on low power.

System off. CPU, memory, and most subsystems shut down.

Memory image saved to disk for recall on power up.

G2, S5, D3 cold

G3

System off. All components either completely shut down or receiving minimum power to perform system wake-up.

System off (mechanical). No power to any internal components except

RTC circuit. [1]

Power

Consumption

Maximum

Low

Low

Low

Minimum

None

Transition

To S0 by [2]

N/A

<35 sec. after power button action

NOTES:

Gn = Global state.

Sn = Sleep state.

Cn = ACPI state.

Dn = PCI state.

[1] Power cord is disconnected for this condition.

[2] Actual transition time dependent on OS and/or application software.

< 2 sec after keyboard or pointing device action

< 5 sec. after keyboard, pointing device, or power button action

<25 sec. after power button action

—

OS Restart

Required

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

—

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-7

Power and Signal Distribution

7.3.1 3.3/5/12 VDC Distribution

The power supply assembly includes a multi-connector cable assembly that routes +3.3 VDC, +5

VDC, +5 VDC STB, +12 VC, and -12 VDC to the system board as well as to the individual drive assemblies. Figure 7-2 shows the power supply cabling for the Ultra Slim Desktop form factor.

P3

P2

P2

5 4 3 2 1

P3

Power Supply

351455

P1

P1

13 24

Conn

P1

P1 [1]

P2

P3

Pin 1

+5 aux

+12

+3.3

RTN

Pin 2

RTN

+5 sns

RTN

RTN

Pin 3

+ 5

RTN

+5

RTN

NOTES:

Connectors not shown to scale.

All + and – values are VDC.

RTN = Return (signal ground) sns = sense

GND = Power ground

RS = Remote sense

FO = Fan off

FSpd = Fan speed

FS = Fan Sink

FC = Fan Command

Vccp = +12 VDC for CPU

[1] This row represents pins 13 – 24 of connector P1.

1

Pin 4

+5

+5

RTN

VccP

Pin 5

PS On

+5

+12

VccP

Pin 6

RTN

+3.3

Pin 7

Pwr Gd

RTN

Pin 8

+3.3

+3.3 sns

Pin 9

+3.3

+3.3

Pin

10

Tach

+3.3

+12

12

Pin

11

RTN

RTN

Pin

12

Fan

-12

Figure 7-2. USDT Power Cable Diagram

7-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Power and Signal Distribution

Figure 7-3 shows the power supply cabling for the SFF/ST systems.

Power Supply

349318

P5 P6

P4

P3

P2

P1

P6

1 2 3 4

P4, P5

5 4 3 2 1

P2

13

4 3 2 1

P1

P3

24

1

12

Conn

P1

P1 [1]

P2

P3

P4, 5

P6

Pin 1

+5 aux

+12

+5

RTN

+3.3

+12

Pin 2

RTN

+5 sns

RTN

RTN

RTN

RTN

Pin 3

+ 5

RTN

RTN

RTN

+5

RTN

Pin 4

+5

+5

+12

VccP

RTN

+5

Connectors not shown to scale.

All + and - values are VDC.

RTN = Return (signal ground) sns = sense

GND = Power ground

RS = Remote sense

FC = Fan command

FO = Fan off

FSpd = Fan speed

FS = Fan Sink

POK = Power OK (power good)

VccP = +12 for CPU

[1] This row represents pins 13–24 of connector P1

Pin 5

PS On

+5

VccP

+12

Pin 6

RTN

+3.3

Pin 7

Pwr Gd

RTN

Pin 8

+3.3

+3.3 sns

Pin 9

+3.3

+3.3

Pin

10

Tach

+3.3

+12

Pin

11

RTN

RTN

Pin

12

Fan

-12

Figure 7-3. SFF/ST Power Cable Diagram

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-9

Power and Signal Distribution

Figure 7-4 shows the power supply cabling for the microtower systems.

Power Supply

366307

P4 P9 P5 P10 P6

P7

P2 P3 P8

P1

1

P8

P9, P10

5 4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

P2, P3, P4, P5, P6

P7

2 4

1 3

13

1 2 3 4

P1

24

12

Conn

P1

P1 [1]

P2-6

P7

P8

P9, 10

Pin 1

+3.3RS

+3.3

+12

RTN

+5

+3.3

Pin 2

+3.3

-12

RTN

RTN

RTN

RTN

Pin 3

RTN

RTN

RTN

+12

RTN

+5

Pin 4

+5

PS On

+5

+12

+12

RTN

Pin 5

RTN

RTN

+12

Pin 6 Pin 7

+5

RTN

RTN

RTN

NOTES:

Connectors not shown to scale.

All + and - values are VDC.

RTN = Return (signal ground)

GND = Power ground

RS = Remote sense

POK = Power ok (power good)

FC = Fan Command

[1] This row represents pins 13–24 of connector P1.

Figure 7-4. MT Power Cable Diagram

Pin 8 Pin 9

POK

Open

5 aux

+5

Pin

10

+12

+5

Pin

11

+12

+5

Pin

12

+3.3

RTN

7-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Power and Signal Distribution

Figure 7-4 shows the power supply cabling for the convertible minitower systems.

Power Supply

349774

P9 P10 P11

P6 P7 P8

P4 P5

P3

P1

1

P4, P5, P9, P10

5 4 3 2 1

P8

4 3 2 1

P6, P7, P11

2

P3

4

13

1 2 3 4

P1

1 3

24

12

Conn

P1

P1 [1]

P3

P4, 5,

9, 10

P6, 7,

11

P8

Pin 1

+3.3

RS

RTN

+3.3

+12

+5

Pin 2

+3.3

-12

RTN

RTN

RTN

RTN

Pin 3

RTN

RTN

VccP

+5.08

RTN

RTN

Pin 4

+5

PS On

VccP

RTN

Pin 5

RTN

RTN

+12

+5

+12

Pin 6 Pin 7

+5

RTN

RTN

RTN

NOTES:

Connectors not shown to scale.

All + and - values are VDC.

RTN = Return (signal ground)

GND = Power ground

RS = Remote sense

POK = Power ok (power good)

FC = Fan Command

[1] This row represents pins 13–24 of connector P1.

Figure 7-5. CMT Power Cable Diagram

Pin 8 Pin 9

POK

Open

5 aux

+5

Pin

10

+12

+5

Pin

11

+12

+5

Pin

12

+3.3

RTN

✎

The 340-watt power supply is also used on some MT SKUs..

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-11

Power and Signal Distribution

7.3.2 Low Voltage Production/Distribution

Auxiliary voltages less than 5 volts and all voltages less than 3.3 volts are produced through regulator circuitry (Figure 7-6) on the system board.

Power Supply

5 Aux

Power Supply

Power Supply

Power Supply

Processor

Aux

PWR

3.3 Aux

3.3 VDC

1.5 V

Regulator

DDR

PWR

2.5 VDC

1.5 VDC

1.5 VDC

DIMMs

DIMMs

DIMMs

Chipset

5 VDC

12 VDC

VID 0-5

Regulator

Circuit

VccP

1.2 VDC

Processor

Processor

Figure 7-6. Low Voltage Supply and Distribution Diagram

The VccP regulator produces the VccP (processor core) voltage according to the strapping of signals VID0..5 by the processor and may range from 0.8375 to 1.6 VDC.

7-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Power and Signal Distribution

Figures 7-7 through 7-9 show general signal distribution between the main subassemblies of the system units.

Chassis Fan

Speaker

Power On

Power LED HD LED

P8 P6

P5

P3

P1

+12 VccP

+3.3, +5, +12 VDC

PS On, POK

Power

Supply

Assembly

System

Board

356023-001

P60

IDE I/F

P21

IDE I/F.,

Diskette I/F.,

CD Audio

SATA

Hard Drive

J66

Kybd data

Mouse data

J67

Mic In, HP Out

Audio

P23

USB 6,7 Tx/Rx

P24

MultiBay

Daughter

Board

Keyboard

Mouse

Front

Panel

I/O Module

CD, DVD, or

Diskette Drive

NOTES:

See Figure 7-10 for header pinout.

Figure 7-7. USDT Form Factor Signal Distribution Diagram

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-13

Power and Signal Distribution

Chassis Fan

Speaker

Power On

Power LED

P8 P6

P5

P3

P1

+12 VccP

+3.3, +5, +12 VDC

PS On, POK

Power

Supply

Assembly

Diskette

P10

Diskette I/F

HD LED

System

Board

356033-001

P60

IDE I/F

P20

IDE I/F

SATA

Hard Drive

CD-ROM

J66

Kybd data

Mouse data

J67

Mic In, HP Out

Audio

P23

USB 6,7 Tx/Rx

P24

Keyboard

Mouse

Front

Panel

I/O Module

NOTES:

See Figure 7-7 for header pinout.

Figure 7-8. SFF / ST Form Factor Signal Distribution Diagram

7-14 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Power and Signal Distribution

Chassis Fan

Speaker

Power On

Power LED

P8 P6

P5

P3

P1

+12 VccP

+3.3, +5, +12 VDC

PS On, POK

Power

Supply

Assembly

Diskette

P10

Diskette I/F

HD LED

System

Board xxxxxx-001

P60

IDE I/F

SATA

Hard Drive

CD-ROM

P20

IDE I/F.

J66

Kybd data

Mouse data

J67

Mic In, HP Out

Audio

P23

USB 6,7 Tx/Rx

P24

J30

PCI 2.3 I/F

PCI Expansion

Daughter Board [1]

Notes:

[1] Applicable to CMT form factor only.

Keyboard

Mouse

Front

Panel

I/O Module

CD Audio

Figure 7-9. MT / CMT Form Factor Signal Distribution Diagram

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-15

Power and Signal Distribution

Power Button/LED, HD LED

Header P5 (USDT, SFF, ST)

HD LED Cathode 1

HD LED Anode 3

GND5

Chassis ID0 9

GND 11

Therm Diode A 13

2 PS LED Cathode

4 PS LED Anode

6 Pwr Btn

8 GND

10 Chassis ID1

12 NC

14 Therm Diode C

Power Button/LED, HD LED

Header P5 (MT, CMT)

HD LED Cathode 1

HD LED Anode 3

GND5

M Reset 7

+5 VDC 9

NC 11

GND 13

Chassis ID2 15

Chassis ID0 17

2 PS LED Cathode

4 PS LED Anode

6 Pwr Btn

8 GND

10 NC

12 GND

16 +5 VDC

18 Chassis ID1

CD ROM Audio

1 Audio (Left Channel)

2 Ground

3 Ground

4 Audio (right channel)

Serial Port A

Header P54

UART1 DCD- 1

UART1 RX DATA 3

UART1 TX DATA 5

UART1 DTR 7

GND 9

2 UART1 DSR-

4 UART1 RTS-

6 UART1 CTS-

8 UART1 RI-

10 Comm A Detect-

Serial Port B

Header P52

UART2 DTR- 1

UART2 CTS- 3

UART2 TX DATA 5

GND 7

+5.0V 9

UART2 RTS- 11

UART2 DCD- 13

+12V 15

2 UART2 RX DATA

4 UART2 DSR-

6 UART2 RI-

8 GND

10 +3.3V aux

12 Comm B Detect

14 -12V

Hood Lock

Header P124

Hood Lock 1

GND 5

2 Coil Conn

4 +12V

6 Hood Unlock

Hood Sense

Header P125

1 Hood SW Detect

2 GND

3 Hood Sensor

NOTE:

No polarity consideration required for connection to speaker header P6.

Figure 7-10. Header Pinouts

7-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

8

BIOS ROM

8.1 Introduction

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

The Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) of the computer is a collection of machine language programs stored as firmware in read-only memory (ROM). The BIOS ROM includes such functions as Power-On Self Test (POST), PCI device initialization, Plug 'n Play support, power management activities, and the Setup utility. The firmware contained in the BIOS ROM supports the following operating systems and specifications:

DOS 6.2

Windows 3.1 (and Windows for Workgroups 3.11)

Windows 95, 98SE, 2000, XP Professional, and XP Home

Windows NT 4.0 (SP6 required for PnP support)

OS/2 ver 2.1 and OS/2 Warp

SCO Unix

DMI 2.1

Intel Wired for Management (WfM) ver. 2.2

Alert-On-LAN (AOL) and Wake-On-LAN (WOL)

ACPI and OnNow

SMBIOS 2.3.1

PC98/99/00 and NetPC

Intel PXE boot ROM for the integrated LAN controller

BIOS Boot Specification 1.01

Enhanced Disk Drive Specification 3.0

“El Torito” Bootable CD-ROM Format Specification 1.0

ATAPI Removeable Media Device BIOS Specification 1.0

The BIOS ROM is a 512KB Intel Firmware Hub (or Firmware Hub-compatible) part. The runtime portion of the BIOS resides in a 128KB block from E0000h to FFFFFh.

8-1 Technical Reference Guide 361834-002

BIOS ROM

This chapter includes the following topics:

■

■

■

■

■

■

ROM flashing (8.2), page 8-2

Boot functions (8.3), page 8-3

Setup utility (8.4) , page 8-6

Client management functions (8.5), page 8-17

PnP support (8.6) , page 8-19

USB legacy support (8.7), page 8-20

The system BIOS firmware is contained in a flash ROM device that can be re-written with BIOS code (using the ROMPAQ utility or a remote flash program) allowing easy upgrading, including changing the splash screen displayed during the POST routine.

8.2.1 Upgrading

Upgrading the BIOS is not normally required but may be necessary if changes are made to the unit's operating system, hard drive, or processor. All BIOS ROM upgrades are available directly from HP. Flashing is done either locally with the HP-provided Windows program, a ROMPaq diskette or remotely using the network boot function (described in the section 8.3.2).

This system includes 64 KB of write-protected boot block ROM that provides a way to recover from a failed flashing of the system BIOS ROM. If the BIOS ROM fails the flash check, the boot block code provides the minimum amount of support necessary to allow booting the system from the diskette drive and re-flashing the system ROM with a ROMPAQ diskette. Note that if an administrator password has been set in the system the boot block will prompt for this password by illuminating the caps lock keyboard LED and displaying a message if video support is available. A PS/2 keyboard must be used during bootblock operation.

Since video may not be available during the initial boot sequence the boot block routine uses the

Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock LEDs of the PS/2 keyboard to communicate the status of the ROM flash as follows:

Table 8-1

Boot Block Codes

Num Lock LED Cap Lock LED Scroll Lock LED

Off On Off

Meaning

Administrator password required.

On

Off

On

Off

Off

On

Off

On

On

Boot failed. Reset required for retry.

Flash failed.

Flash complete.

8-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

BIOS ROM

8.2.2 Changeable Splash Screen

✎

A corrupted splash screen may be restored by the user with the ROMPAQ software. Depending on the system, changing (customizing) the splash screen may only be available with asistance from HP.

The splash screen (image displayed during POST) is stored in the BIOS ROM and may be replaced with another image of choice by using the Image Flash utility (Flashi.exe). The Image

Flash utility allows the user to browse directories for image searching and pre-viewing.

Background and foreground colors can be chosen from the selected image's palette.

The splash screen image requirements are as follows:

■

■

■

■

Format = Windows bitmap with 4-bit RLE encoding

Size = 424 (width) x 320 (height) pixels

Colors = 16 (4 bits per pixel)

File Size = < 64 KB

The Image Flash utility can be invoked at a command line for quickly flashing a known image as follows:

>\Flashi.exe [Image_Filename] [Background_Color] [Foreground_Color]

The utility checks to insure that the specified image meets the splash screen requirements listed above or it will not be loaded into the ROM.

The BIOS supports various functions related to the boot process, including those that occur during the Power On Self-Test (POST) routine.

8.3.1 Boot Device Order

The default boot device order is as follows:

1. IDE CD-ROM drive (EL Torito CD images)

2. Diskette drive (A:)

3. MultiBay device (A: or CD-ROM) if applicable

4. USB device

5. Hard drive (C:)

6. Network interface controller

The order can be changed in the ROM-based Setup utility (accessed by pressing F10 when so prompted during POST). The options are displayed only if the device is attached, except for USB devices. The USB option is displayed even if no USB storage devices are present. The hot IPL option is available through the F9 utility, which allows the user to select a hot IPL boot device.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-3

BIOS ROM

8.3.2 Network Boot (F12) Support

■

■

■

The BIOS supports booting the system to a network server. The function is accessed by pressing the F12 key when prompted at the lower right hand corner of the display during POST. Booting to a network server allows for such functions as:

Flashing a ROM on a system without a functional operating system (OS).

Installing an OS.

Installing an application.

These systems include, as standard, an integrated Intel 82562-equivalent NIC with Preboot

Execution Environment (PXE) ROM and can boot with a NetPC-compliant server.

8.3.3 Memory Detection and Configuration

■

■

■

■

■

This system uses the Serial Presence Detect (SPD) method of determining the installed DIMM configuration. The BIOS communicates with an EEPROM on each DIMM through the SMBus to obtain data on the following DIMM parameters:

Presence

Size

Type

Timing/CAS latency

PC133 capability

✎

Refer to Chapter 3, “Processor/Memory Subsystem” for the SPD format and DIMM data specific to this system.

The BIOS performs memory detection and configuration with the following steps:

1. Program the buffer strength control registers based on SPD data and the DIMM slots that are populated.

2. Determine the common CAS latency that can be supported by the DIMMs.

3. Determine the memory size for each DIMM and program the GMCH accordingly.

4. Enable refresh

8-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

BIOS ROM

8.3.4 Boot Error Codes

The BIOS provides visual and audible indications of a failed system boot by using the LEDS on the PS/2 keyboard and the system board speaker. The error conditions are listed in the following table.

Visual [1]

Num Lock LED blinks

Scroll Lock LED blinks

Caps Lock LED blinks

Table 8-2

Boot Error Codes

Audible

1 short, 2 long beeps

2 long, 1 short beeps

1 long, 2 short beeps

Meaning

System memory not present or incompatible.

Hardware failure before graphics initialization.

Graphics controller not present or failed to initialize.

ROM failure.

Num, Caps, Scroll Lock LEDs blink

1 long, 3 short beeps

Num, Caps, Scroll Lock LEDs blink in sequence none Network service mode

NOTE:

[1] Provided with PS/2 keyboard only.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-5

BIOS ROM

8-6

The Setup utility (stored in ROM) allows the user to configure system functions involving security, power management, and system resources. The Setup utility is ROM-based and invoked when the F10 key is pressed and held during the computer boot cycle. Highlights of the Setup utility are described in the following table.

✎

After pressing and releasing the computer’s power button, press and hold the F10 key until the

Setup Utility screen is displayed.

Table 8-3

Setup Utility

Heading Option Description

File System Lists:

• Product name

• Processor type/speed/stepping

• Cache size (L1/L2)

• Installed memory size/speed, number of channels (single or dual) (if applicable)

• Integrated MAC address for embedded, enabled NIC (if applicable)

• System ROM (includes family name and version)

• Chassis serial number

• Asset tracking number

About Displays copyright information.

Set Time and Date Allows you to set system time and date.

Replicated Setup Save to Removable Media

Saves system configuration, including CMOS, to a formatted

1.44-MB diskette, a USB flash media device, or a diskette-like device (a storage device set to emulate a diskette drive).

Restore from Removable Media

Restores system configuration from a diskette, a USB flash media device, or a diskette-like device.

Default Setup

Apply Defaults and Exit

Save Current Settings as Default

Saves the current system configuration settings as the default.

Restore Factory Settings as Default

Restores the factory system configuration settings as the default.

Applies the currently selected default settings and clears any established passwords.

Ignore Changes and Exit

Exits Computer Setup without applying or saving any changes.

✎

Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

BIOS ROM

Heading

File

(continued)

Option

Save Changes and

Exit

Table 8-3

Setup Utility

Description

Saves changes to system configuration or default settings and exits

Computer Setup.

Storage Device

Configuration

Lists all installed BIOS-controlled storage devices.

When a device is selected, detailed information and options are displayed. The following options may be presented.

Diskette Type

Identifies the highest capacity media type accepted by the diskette drive.

Legacy Diskette Drives

Options are 3.5" 1.44 MB and

5.25" 1.2 MB.

Drive Emulation

Allows you to select a drive emulation type for a certain storage device. (For example, a Zip drive can be made bootable by selecting diskette emulation.)

Drive Type

ATAPI Zip drive

ATA Hard disk

Emulation Options

None (treated as Other)

Diskette (treated as diskette drive)

None (treated as Other)

Legacy diskette

CD-ROM drive

ATAPI LS-120

Disk (treated as hard drive)

No emulation options available

No emulation options available

None (treated as Other).

Diskette (treated as diskette drive).

Default Values IDE/SATA

Multisector Transfers (ATA disks only)

Specifies how many sectors are transferred per multi-sector PIO operation. Options (subject to device capabilities) are Disabled, 8, and 16.

Ä

CAUTION: Ordinarily, the translation mode selected automatically by the BIOS should not be changed. If the selected translation mode is not compatible with the translation mode that was active when the disk was partitioned and formatted, the data on the disk will be inaccessible.

✎

Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-7

BIOS ROM

Heading Option

Storage Options

Table 8-3

Setup Utility

Description

Translation Parameters (ATA disks only)

✎

This feature appears only when User translation mode is selected.

Allows you to specify the parameters (logical cylinders, heads, and sectors per track) used by the BIOS to translate disk I/O requests

(from the operating system or an application) into terms the hard drive can accept. Logical cylinders may not exceed 1024. The number of heads may not exceed 256. The number of sectors per track may not exceed 63. These fields are only visible and changeable when the drive translation mode is set to User.

Removable Media Boot

Enables/disables ability to boot the system from removable media.

Legacy Diskette Write

Enables/disables ability to write data to legacy diskettes.

✎

After saving changes to Removable Media Write, the computer will restart. Turn the computer off, then on, manually.

BIOS DMA Data Transfers

Allows you to control how BIOS disk I/O requests are serviced.

When “Enable” is selected, the BIOS will service ATA disk read and write requests with DMA data transfers. When “Disable” is selected, the BIOS will service ATA disk read and write requests with PIO data transfers.

SATA Emulation

Allows you to choose how the SATA controller and devices are accessed by the operating system.

“Separate IDE Controller” is the default option. Up to 4 SATA and 2

PATA devices may be accessed in this mode. The SATA and PATA controllers appear as two separate IDE controllers. Use this option with Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows XP.

• SATA 0 is seen as SATA Primary Device 0

• SATA 1 (if present) is seen as SATA Secondary Device 0

“Combined IDE Controller” is the other option. Up to 2 PATA and 2

SATA devices may be accessed in this mode. The SATA and PATA controllers appear as one combined IDE controller. Use this option with Microsoft Windows 98 and earlier operating systems.

• PATA Primary Device 0 replaces SATA 1

• PATA Primary Device 1 replaces SATA 3

IDE Controller

Allows you to enable or disable the primary IDE controller. This feature is supported on select models only.

Primary SATA Controller

Allows you to enable or disable the Primary SATA controller.

✎

Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

8-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

BIOS ROM

Heading

Storage

(continued)

Option

DPS Self-Test

Boot Order

Table 8-3

Setup Utility

Description

Secondary SATA Controller

Allows you to enable or disable the Secondary SATA controller. This feature is supported on select models only.

Allows you to execute self-tests on ATA hard drives capable of performing the Drive Protection System (DPS) self-tests.

✎

This selection will only appear when at least one drive capable of performing the DPS self-tests is attached to the system.

Allows you to:

• Specify the order in which attached devices (such as a USB flash media device, diskette drive, hard drive, optical drive, or network interface card) are checked for a bootable operating system image. Each device on the list may be individually excluded from or included for consideration as a bootable operating system source.

• Specify the order of attached hard drives. The first hard drive in the order will have priority in the boot sequence and will be recognized as drive C (if any devices are attached).

✎

MS-DOS drive lettering assignments may not apply after a non-MS-DOS operating system has started.

Shortcut to Temporarily Override Boot Order

To boot one time from a device other than the default device specified in Boot Order, restart the computer and press F9 when the monitor light turns green. After POST is completed, a list of bootable devices is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the preferred bootable device and press Enter. The computer then boots from the selected non-default device for this one time.

Security Setup Password

Power-On

Password

Allows you to set and enables setup (administrator) password.

✎

If the setup password is set, it is required to change Computer

Setup options, flash the ROM, and make changes to certain plug and play settings under Windows.

See the Troubleshooting Guide on the Documentation CD for more information.

Allows you to set and enable power-on password.

See the Troubleshooting Guide for more information.

Password Options

(This selection will appear only if a power-on password is set.)

Allows you to specify whether the password is required for warm boot (CTRL+ALT+DEL).

See the Desktop Management Guide for more information.

✎

Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-9

BIOS ROM

Heading

Security

(continued)

Option

Smart Cover

Embedded

Security

Device Security

Network Service

Boot

System IDs

Table 8-3

Setup Utility

Description

Allows you to:

• Lock/unlock the Cover Lock.

• Set the Cover Removal Sensor to Disable/Notify User/Setup

Password.

✎

Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that the cover has been removed. Setup Password requires that the setup password be entered to boot the computer if the sensor detects that the cover has been removed.

This feature is supported on select models only. See the Desktop

Management Guide on the Documentation CD for more information.

Allows you to:

• Enable/disable the Embedded Security device.

• Reset the device to Factory Settings.

This feature is supported on select models only. See the Desktop

Management Guide on the Documentation CD for more information.

Enables/disables serial ports, parallel port, front USB ports, system audio, network controllers (some models), MultiBay devices (some models), SMBus controller (some models), and SCSI controllers

(some models).

Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an operating system installed on a network server. (Feature available on NIC models only; the network controller must reside on the PCI bus or be embedded on the system board.)

Allows you to set:

• Asset tag (18-byte identifier) and ownership Tag (80-byte identifier displayed during POST).

See the Desktop Management Guide on the Documentation CD for more information.

• Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) number. The UUID can only be updated if the current chassis serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers are normally set in the factory and are used to uniquely identify the system.)

• Keyboard locale setting (for example, English or German) for

System ID entry.

✎

Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

8-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

BIOS ROM

Heading

Security

(continued)

Table 8-3

Setup Utility

Option Description

DriveLock Security Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for

MultiBay hard drives. When this feature is enabled, the user is prompted to provide one of the DriveLock passwords during POST. If neither is successfully entered, the hard drive will remain inaccessible until one of the passwords is successfully provided during a subsequent cold-boot sequence.

✎

This selection will only appear when at least one MultiBay drive that supports the DriveLock feature is attached to the system.

See the Desktop Management Guide on the Documentation CD for more information.

Data Execution

Prevention

Master Boot

Record Security*

Enable/Disable.

Data Execution Prevention Mode help prevent OS security breaches.

✎

This selection is in effect only if the processor and operating system being used comprehend and utilize the function.

Allows you to enable or disable Master Boot Record (MBR) Security.

When enabled, the BIOS rejects all requests to write to the MBR on the current bootable disk. Each time the computer is powered on or rebooted, the BIOS compares the MBR of the bootable disk to the previously saved MBR. If changes are detected, you are given the option of saving the MBR on the current bootable disk, restoring the previously-saved MBR, or disabling MBR security. You must know the setup password if one is set.

✎

Disable MBR Security before intentionally changing the formatting or partitioning of the current bootable disk. Several disk utilities

(such as FDISK and FORMAT) attempt to update the MBR.

If MBR Security is enabled and disk accesses are being serviced by the BIOS, write requests to the MBR are rejected, causing the utilities to report errors.

If MBR Security is enabled and disk accesses are being serviced by the operating system, any MBR change will be detected by the

BIOS during the next reboot, and an MBR Security warning message will be displayed.

Save Master Boot

Record*

Saves a backup copy of the Master Boot Record of the current bootable disk.

✎

Only appears if MBR Security is enabled.

✎

Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-11

BIOS ROM

Heading Option

Restore Master

Boot Record*

Table 8-3

Setup Utility

Description

Restores the backup Master Boot Record to the current bootable disk.

✎

Only appears if all of the following conditions are true:

MBR Security is enabled.

A backup copy of the MBR has been previously saved.

The current bootable disk is the same disk from which the backup copy of the MBR was saved.

Ä

CAUTION: Restoring a previously saved MBR after a disk utility or operating system has modified the MBR may cause the data on the disk to become inaccessible. Only restore a previously saved

MBR ifyou are confident that the current bootable disk’s MBR has been corrupted or infected with a virus.

Power OS Power

Management

• Runtime Power Management - Enable/Disable. Allows certain operating systems to reduce processor voltage and frequency when the current software load does not require the full capabilities of the processor.

• Idle Power Savings - Extended/Normal. Allows certain operating systems to decrease the processors power consumption when the processor is idle.

• ACPI S3 Support - Enables or disables ACPI S3 support.

• ACPI S3 Hard Disk Reset - Enabling this causes the BIOS to ensure hard disks are ready to accept commands after resuming from S3 before returning control to the operating system.

• ACPI S3 PS2 Mouse Wakeup - Enables or disables waking from

S3 due to PS2 mouse activity.

SATA power management enables or disables SATA bus and/or device power management.

Hardware Power

Management

Thermal Fan idle mode - This bar graph controls the minimum permitted fan speed.

✎

Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

8-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

BIOS ROM

Table 8-3

Setup Utility

Heading Option Description

Advanced*

*For advanced users only

Power-On Options Allows you to set:

• POST mode (QuickBoot, FullBoot, or FullBoot every 1-30 days).

• POST messages (enable/disable).

• F9 prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will display the text F9=Boot Menu during POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but pressing F9 will still access the Shortcut Boot (Order) Menu screen. See Storage >

Boot Order for more information.

• F10 prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will display the text F10=Setup during POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but pressing F10 will still access the Setup screen.

• F12 prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will display the text F12=Network Service Boot during POST.

Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but pressing F12 will still force the system to attempt booting from the network.

• Option ROM* prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will cause the system to display a message before loading options ROMs. (This feature is supported on select models only.)

• Remote wakeup boot source (remote server/local hard drive).

• After Power Loss (off/on/previous state): After power loss, if you connect your computer to an electric power strip and would like to turn on power to the computer using the switch on the power strip, set this option to ON.

✎

If you turn off power to your computer using the switch on a power strip, you will not be able to use the suspend/sleep feature or the Remote Management features.

• POST Delay (in seconds) (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will add a user-specified delay to the POST process. This delay is sometimes needed for hard disks on some PCI cards that spin up very slowly; so slowly that they are not ready to boot by the time POST is finished. The POST delay also gives you more time to press F10 to enter Computer (F10) Setup.

• I/O APIC Mode (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will allow Microsoft Windows Operating Systems to run optimally.

This feature must be disabled for certain non-Microsoft

Operating Systems to work properly.

✎

Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-13

BIOS ROM

Heading

Advanced*

(continued)

*For advanced users only

Option

Power-On Options

(continued)

BIOS Power-On

Onboard Devices

PCI Devices

Table 8-3

Setup Utility

Description

Allows you to set: (continued)

• ACPI/USB Buffers @ Top of Memory (enable/disable).

Enabling this feature places USB memory buffers at the top of memory. The advantage is that some amount of memory below 1 MB is freed up for use by option ROMs. The disadvantage is that a popular memory manager, HIMEM.SYS, does not work properly when USB buffers are at top of memory

AND the system has 64 MB or less of RAM.

• Hyper-threading (enable/disable).

• Limit CPUID Maximum Value to 3 - Restricts the number of

CPUID functions reported by the microprocessor. Enable this feature if booting to WinNT.

Allows you to set the computer to turn on automatically at a time you specify.

Allows you to set resources for or disable onboard system devices

(diskette controller, serial port, or parallel port).

• Lists currently installed PCI devices and their IRQ settings.

• Allows you to reconfigure IRQ settings for these devices or to disable them entirely. These settings have no effect under an

APIC-based operating system.

Bus Options* On select models, allows you to enable or disable:

• PCI SERR# Generation.

• PCI VGA palette snooping, which sets the VGA palette snooping bit in PCI configuration space; only needed when more than one graphics controller is installed.

✎

Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

8-14 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

BIOS ROM

Heading

Advanced*

(continued)

*For advanced users only

Option

Device options

Table 8-3

Setup Utility

Description

Allows you to set:

• Printer mode (bi-directional, EPP & ECP, output only).

• Num Lock state at power-on (off/on).

• S5 Wake on LAN (enable/disable).

• To disable Wake on LAN during the off state (S5), use the arrow

(left and right) keys to select the Advanced > Device Options menu and set the S5 Wake on Lan feature to “Disable.” This obtains the lowest power consumption available on the computer during S5. It does not affect the ability of the computer to Wake on

LAN from suspend or hibernation, but will prevent it from waking from S5 via the network. It does not affect operation of the network connection while the computer is on.

• If a network connection is not required, completely disable the network controller (NIC) by using the arrow (left and right) keys to select the Security > Device Security menu. Set the Network

Controller option to “Device Hidden.” This prevents the network controller from being used by the operating system and reduces the power used by the computer in S5.

• Processor cache (enable/disable).

• Unique Sleep State Blink Patterns. Allows you to choose an LED blink pattern that uniquely identifies each sleep state.

• Integrated Video (enable/disable) Allows you to use integrated video and PCI Up Solution video at the same time (available on select models only).

✎

Inserting a PCI or PCI Express video card automatically disables

Integrated Video. When PCI Express video is on, Integrated

Video must remain disabled.

• Monitor Tracking (enable/disable). Allows ROM to save monitor asset information.

Allows you to set:

• NIC PXE Option ROM Download (enable/disable). The BIOS contains an embedded NIC option ROM to allow the unit to boot through the network to a PXE server. This is typically used to download a corporate image to a hard drive. The NIC option ROM takes up memory space below 1MB commonly referred to as DOS Compatibility Hole (DCH) space. This space is limited. This F10 option will allow users to disable the downloading of this embedded NIC option ROM thus giving more DCH space for additional PCI cards which may need option ROM space. The default will be to have the NIC option

ROM enabled.

PCI VGA

Configuration

Displayed only if there are multiple PCI video adapters in the system. Allows you to specify which VGA controller will be the

“boot” or primary VGA controller.

✎

Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-15

BIOS ROM

8.5 Client Management Functions

Table 8-4 provides a partial list of the client management BIOS functions supported by the systems covered in this guide. These functions, designed to support intelligent manageability applications, are Compaq-specific unless otherwise indicated.

Table 8-4.

Client Management Functions (INT15)

AX

E800h

E813h

E814h

E816h

E817h

E818h

Function

Get system ID

Get monitor data

Get system revision

Get temperature status

Get drive attribute

Get drive off-line test

E819h Get chassis serial number

E820h [1] Get system memory map

E81Ah

E81Bh

Write chassis serial number

Get hard drive threshold

E81Eh

E827h

Get hard drive ID

DIMM EEPROM Access

Mode

Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.

Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.

Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.

Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.

Real

Real

Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.

Real

Real

Real

Real

Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.

NOTE:

[1] Industry standard function.

All 32-bit protected-mode functions are accessed by using the industry-standard BIOS32 Service

Directory. Using the service directory involves three steps:

1. Locating the service directory.

2. Using the service directory to obtain the entry point for the client management functions.

3. Calling the client management service to perform the desired function.

The BIOS32 Service Directory is a 16-byte block that begins on a 16-byte boundary between the physical address range of 0E0000h-0FFFFFh.

The following subsections provide a brief description of key Client Management functions.

8-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

BIOS ROM

8.5.1 System ID and ROM Type

Diagnostic applications can use the INT 15, AX=E800h BIOS function to identify the type of system. This function will return the system ID in the BX register. systems have the following

IDs and ROM family types:

Table 8-5

System ID

System (Form Factor) System ID

USDT 0980h

SFF/ ST:

DDR

DDR2

097Ch

09D0h uT:

DDR

DDR2

0984h

09CCh

CMT:

DDR

DDR2

0968h

09C8h

NOTE: All systems use BIOS ROM Family 786C1 and PnP ID CPQ0968.

The ROM family and version numbers can be verified with the Setup utility or the Compaq

Insight Manager or Diagnostics applications.

8.5.2 Temperature Status

The BIOS includes a function (INT15, AX=E816h) to retrieve the status of a system's interior temperature. This function allows an application to check whether the temperature situation is at a Normal, Caution, or Critical condition.

8.5.3 Drive Fault Prediction

The BIOS directly supports Drive Fault Prediction for IDE (ATA)-type hard drives. This feature is provided through two Client Management BIOS calls. Function INT 15, AX=E817h is used to retrieve a 512-byte block of drive attribute data while the INT 15, AX=E81Bh is used to retrieve the drive's warranty threshold data. If data is returned indicating possible failure then the following message is displayed:

1720-SMART Hard Drive detects imminent failure

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-17

BIOS ROM

The BIOS includes Plug 'n Play (PnP) support for PnP version 1.0A. Table 8-6 lists the PnP functions supported.

Table 8-6.

PnP BIOS Functions

Function

00h

01h

Register

Get number of system device nodes

Get system device node

02h

03h

04h

50h

51h

Set system device node

Get event

Send message

Get SMBIOS Structure Information

Get Specific SMBIOS Structure

The BIOS call INT 15, AX=E841h, BH=01h can be used by an application to retrieve the default settings of PnP devices for the user. The application should use the following steps for the display function:

1. Call PnP function 01(get System Device Node) for each devnode with bit 1 of the control flag set (get static configuration) and save the results.

2. Call INT 15, AX=E841h, BH=01h.

3. Call PnP “Get Static Configuration” for each devnode and display the defaults.

4. If the user chooses to save the configuration, no further action is required. The system board devices will be configured at the next boot. If the user wants to abandon the changes, then the application must call PnP function 02 (Set System Device Node) for each devnode (with bit

1 of the control flag set for static configuration) with the results from the calls made prior to invoking this function.

8-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

BIOS ROM

8.6.1 SMBIOS

In support of the DMI specification the PnP functions 50h and 51h are used to retrieve the

SMBIOS data. Function 50h retrieves the number of structures, size of the largest structure, and

SMBIOS version. Function 51h retrieves a specific structure. This system supports SMBIOS version 2.3.1 and the following structure types:

17

19

20

31

9

13

15

16

32

128

7

8

3

4

Type

0

1

Data

BIOS Information

System Information

System Enclosure or Chassis

Processor Information

Cache Information

Port Connector Information

System Slots

BIOS Language Information

System Event Log Information

Physical Memory Array

Memory Devices

Memory Array Mapped Addresses

Memory Device Mapped Addresses

Boot Integrity Service Entry Point

System Boot Information

OEM Defined Structure with Intel Alert-On-LAN (AOL)

Information

✎

System information on these systems is handled exclusively through the SMBIOS.

8.7 USB Legacy Support

The BIOS ROM checks the USB port, during POST, for the presence of a USB keyboard. This allows a system with only a USB keyboard to be used during ROM-based setup and also on a system with an OS that does not include a USB driver.

On such a system a keystroke will generate an SMI and the SMI handler will retrieve the data from the device and convert it to PS/2 data. The data will be passed to the keyboard controller and processed as in the PS/2 interface. Changing the delay and/or typematic rate of a USB keyboard though BIOS function INT 16 is not supported.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-19

BIOS ROM

8-20 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

A

Error Messages and Codes

A.1 Introduction

This appendix lists the error codes and a brief description of the probable cause of the error.

✎

Errors listed in this appendix are applicable only for systems running HP/Compaq BIOS.

Not all errors listed in this appendix may be applicable to a particular system model and/or configuration.

A.2 Beep/Keyboard LED Codes

✎

Beep and LED indictions listed in Table A-1 apply only to HP-branded models.

Beeps

1 short, 2 long

1 long, 2 short

2 long, 1 short

1 long, 3 short

None

None

None

None

None

Table A-1.

Beep/Keyboard LED Codes

LED [1]

NUM lock blinking

CAP lock blinking

Scroll lock blinking

(None)

All three blink in sequence

NUM lock steady on

CAP lock steady on

All three blink together

All three steady on

Probable Cause

Base memory failure.

Video/graphics controller failure.

System failure (prior to video initialization).

Boot block executing

Keyboard locked in network mode.

ROMPAQ diskette not present, bad, or drive not ready.

Password prompt.

ROM flash failed.

Successful ROM flash.

NOTES:

[1] PS/2 keyboard only.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-1

Error Messages and Codes

A.3 Power-On Self Test (POST) Messages

Error Message

Table A-2.

Power-On Self Test (POST) Messages

Probable Cause

Invalid Electronic Serial Number Chassis serial number is corrupt. Use Setup to enter a valid number.

Network Server Mode Active (w/o kybd)

System is in network mode.

101-Option ROM Checksum Error A device’s option ROM has failed/is bad.

110-Out of Memory Space for

Option ROMs

102-system Board Failure

150-Safe POST Active

162-System Options Not Set

163-Time & Date Not Set

164-Memory Size Error

201-Memory Error

Recently added PCI card contains and option ROM too large to download during POST.

Failed ESCD write, A20, timer, or DMA controller.

An option ROM failed to execute on a previous boot.

Invalid checksum, RTC lost power, or invalid configuration.

Date and time information in CMOS is not valid.

Memory has been added or removed.

Memory test failed.

213-Incompatible Memory Module BIOS detected installed DIMM(s) as being not compatible.

214-DIM Configuration Warning A specific error has occurred in a memory device installed in the identified socket.

216-Memory Size Exceeds Max Installed memory exceeds the maximum supported by the system.

217-DIMM Configuration Warning Unbalanced memory configuration.

219-ECC Memory Module

Detected ECC Modules not supported on this platform

Recently added memory module(s) support ECC memory error correction.

301-Keyboard Error

303-Keyboard Controller Error

Keyboard interface test failed (improper connection or stuck key).

Keyboard buffer failed empty (8042 failure or stuck key).

304-Keyboard/System Unit Error Keyboard controller failed self-test.

404-Parallel Port Address Conflict Current parallel port address is conflicting with another device.

417-Network Interface Card

Failure

NIC BIOS could not read Device ID of embedded NIC.

501-Display Adapter Failure

510-Splash Image Corrupt

511-CPU Fan Not Detected

Graphics display controller.

Corrupted splash screen image. Restore default image w/ROMPAQ.

Processor heat sink fan is not connected.

A-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Error Messages and Codes

Error Message

512-Chassis Fan Not Detected

Table A-2. (Continued)

Power-On Self Test (POST) Messages

Probable Cause

Chassis fan is not connected.

CPU fan is not connected or may have malfunctioned.

514-CPU or Chassis Fan not detected.

601-Diskette Controller Error

605-Diskette Drive Type Error

Diskette drive removed since previous boot.

Mismatch in drive type.

Cover (hood) removal has been detected by the Smart Cover Sensor.

912-Computer Cover Removed

Since Last System Start Up

914-Hood Lock Coil is not

Connected

Smart Cover Lock mechanism is missing or not connected.

916-Power Button Not Connected Power button harness has been detached or unseated from the system board.

917-Expansion Riser Not Detected Expansion (backplane) board not seated properly.

919-Front Panel, MultiPort, and/or

MultiBay Risers not Detected

Riser card has been removed or has not been reinstalled properly in the system.

1156-Serial Port A Cable Not

Detected

1157-Front Cables Not Detected

Cable from serial port header to I/O connector is missing or not connected properly.

Cable from front panel USB and audio connectors is missing or not connected properly.

1720-SMART Hard Drive Detects

Imminent Failure

1721-SMART SCSI Hard Drive

Detects Imminent Failure

SMART circuitry on an IDE drive has detected possible equipment failure.

SMART circuitry on a SCSI drive has detected possible equipment failure.

1785-MultiBay incorrectly installed For MultiBay option or

non-USDT systems:

Multibay option ribbon cables not seated or improperly attached.

or

MultiBay device not properly seated.

or

MultiBay diskette present

For integrated MultiBay/ USDT systems:

MultiBay device not properly seated.

or

MultiBay riser not properly seated.

1794--Inaccessible device attached to SATA 1

(for systems with 2 SATA ports)

A device is attached to SATA 1. Any device attached to this connector will be inaccessible while “SATA Emulation” is set to “Combined IDE

Controller” in Computer Setup.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-3

Error Messages and Codes

Table A-2. (Continued)

Power-On Self Test (POST) Messages

Error Message Probable Cause

1794-Inaccessible devices attached to SATA 1 and/or SATA 3

(for systems with 4 SATA ports)

A device is attached to SATA 1 and/or SATA 3.

Devices attached to these connectors will be inaccessible while “SATA

Emulation” is set to “Combined IDE Controller” in Computer Setup

1796-SATA Cabling Error

1801-Microcode Patch Error

1998-Master Boot Record Backup

Has Been Lost

A processor is installed for which the BIOS ROM has no patch. Check for ROM update.

Backup copy of the hard drive master boot record is corrupted. Use

Setup to restore the backup from the hard drive.

1999-Master Boot Record Has

Changed. Press Any Key To Enter

Setup to Restore the MBR.

2000-Master boot Record hard drive has changed

Invalid Electronic Serial Number

One or more SATA devices are improperly attached. For optimal performance, the SATA 0 and SATA 1 connectors must be used before

SATA 2 and SATA 3.

If Master Boot Record Security is enabled, this message indicates that the MBR has changed since the backup was made.

The hard drive has been changed. Use Setup to create a backup of the new hard drive.

Electronic serial number has become corrupted.

Keyboard failure while Network Server Mode enabled.

Network Server Mode Active and

No Keyboard Attached

Parity Check 2 Keyboard failure while Network Server Mode enabled.

A-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Error Messages and Codes

A.4 System Error Messages (1xx-xx)

105-09

105-10

105-11

105-12

105-13

105-14

106-01

107-01

108-02

108-03

109-01

105-01

105-02

105-03

105-04

105-05

105-06

105-07

105-08

Message

101

102

103

104-01

104-02

104-03

Probable Cause

Option ROM error

System board failure [1]

System board failure

Master int. cntlr. test fialed

Slave int. cntlr. test failed

Int. cntlr. SW RTC inoperative

Port 61 bit <6> not at zero

Port 61 bit <5> not at zero

Port 61 bit <3> not at zero

Port 61 bit <1> not at zero

Port 61 bit <0> not at zero

Port 61 bit <5> not at one

Port 61 bit <3> not at one

Port 61 bit <1> not at one

Port 61 bit <0> not at one

Port 61 I/O test failed

Port 61 bit <7> not at zero

Port 61 bit <2> not at zero

No int. generated by failsafe timer

NMI not triggered by failsafe timer

Keyboard controller test failed

CMOS RAM test failed

CMOS interrupt test failed

CMOS not properly initialized (int.test)

CMOS clock load data test failed

112-07

112-08

112-09

112-10

112-11

112-12

113-01

114-01

116-xx

162-xx

163-xx

164-xx

199-00

Table A-3.

System Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

109-02

109-03

110-01

110-02

CMOS clock rollover test failed

CMOS not properly initialized (clk test)

Programmable timer load data test failed

Programmable timer dynamic test failed

110-03

111-01

112-01

112-02

112-03

112-04

112-05

112-06

Program timer 2 load data test failed

Refresh detect test failed

Speed test Slow mode out of range

Speed test Mixed mode out of range

Speed test Fast mode out of range

Speed test unable to enter Slow mode

Speed test unable to enter Mixed mode

Speed test unable to enter Fast mode

Speed test system error

Unable to enter Auto mode in speed test

Unable to enter High mode in speed test

Speed test High mode out of range

Speed test Auto mode out of range

Speed test variable speed mode inop.

Protected mode test failed

Speaker test failed

Way 0 read/write test failed

Sys. options failed (mismatch in drive type)

Time and date not set

Memory size

Installed devices test failed

NOTES:

[1] 102 message code may be caused by one of a variety of processor-related problems that may be solved by replacing the processor, although system board replacement may be needed.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-5

Error Messages and Codes

204-03

204-04

204-05

205-01

205-02

205-03

206-xx

207-xx

210-01

210-02

210-03

211-01

202-01

202-02

202-03

203-01

203-02

203-03

204-01

204-02

Message

200-04

200-05

200-06

200-07

200-08

201-01

A.5 Memory Error Messages (2xx-xx)

Table A-4.

Memory Error Messages

Probable Cause

Real memory size changed

Extended memory size changed

Invalid memory configuration

Extended memory size changed

CLIM memory size changed

Memory machine ID test failed

Memory system ROM checksum failed

Failed RAM/ROM map test

Failed RAM/ROM protect test

Memory read/write test failed

Error while saving block in read/write test

Error while restoring block in read/write test

Memory address test failed

Error while saving block in address test

Error while restoring block in address test

A20 address test failed

Page hit address test failed

Walking I/O test failed

Error while saving block in walking I/O test

Error while restoring block in walking I/O test

Increment pattern test failed

ECC failure

Memory increment pattern test

Error while saving memory during increment pattern test

Error while restoring memory during increment pattern test

Memory random pattern test

A-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Error Messages and Codes

Message

211-02

211-03

213-xx

214-xx

215-xx

Table A-4. (Continued)

Memory Error Messages

Probable Cause

Error while saving memory during random memory pattern test

Error while restoring memory during random memory pattern test

Incompatible DIMM in slot x

Noise test failed

Random address test

A.6 Keyboard Error Messages (30x-xx)

Message Probable Cause

300-xx Failed ID test

301-01

301-02

Kybd short test, 8042 self-test failed

Kybd short test, interface test failed

Table A-5.

Keyboard Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

303-05 LED test, LED command test failed

303-06 LED test, LED command test failed

303-07 LED test, LED command test failed

301-03

301-04

301-05

302-xx

Kybd short test, echo test failed

Kybd short test, kybd reset failed

Kybd short test, kybd reset failed

Failed individual key test

303-08

303-09

304-01

304-02

LED test, command byte restore test failed

LED test, LEDs failed to light

Keyboard repeat key test failed

Unable to enter mode 3

302-01

303-01

303-02

303-03

303-04

Kybd long test failed

LED test, 8042 self-test failed

LED test, reset test failed

LED test, reset failed

LED test, LED command test failed --

304-03

304-04

304-05

304-06

Incorrect scan code from keyboard

No Make code observed

Cannot /disable repeat key feature

Unable to return to Normal mode

--

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-7

Error Messages and Codes

A.7 Printer Error Messages (4xx-xx)

Table A-6

Printer Error Messages

Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause

401-01

402-01

Printer failed or not connected

Printer data register failed

402-11

402-12

Interrupt test, data/cntrl. reg. failed

Interrupt test and loopback test failed

402-02

402-03

402-04

402-05

Printer control register failed

Data and control registers failed

Loopback test failed

402-13

402-14

402-15

402-16

Int. test, LpBk. test., and data register failed

Int. test, LpBk. test., and cntrl. register failed

Int. test, LpBk. test., and data/cntrl. reg. failed

Unexpected interrupt received

402-06

Loopback test and data reg. failed

Loopback test and cntrl. reg. failed

402-01 Printer pattern test failed

402-07

402-08

402-09

402-10

Loopback tst, data/cntrl. reg. failed

403-xx

Interrupt test failed 404-xx

Interrupt test and data reg. failed 498-00

Interrupt test and control reg. failed

--

Printer pattern test failed

Parallel port address conflict

Printer failed or not connected

--

A.8 Video (Graphics) Error Messages (5xx-xx)

Table A-7.

Video (Graphics) Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

501-01 Video controller test failed

Message

508-01

Probable Cause

320x200 mode, color set 0 test failed

502-01

503-01

504-01

505-01

506-01

507-01

Video memory test failed

Video attribute test failed

Video character set test failed

80x25 mode, 9x14 cell test failed

40x25 mode test failed

509-01

510-01

511-01

512-01

80x25 mode, 8x8 cell test failed 514-01

516-01

320x200 mode, color set 1 test failed

640x200 mode test failed

Screen memory page test failed

Gray scale test failed

White screen test failed

Noise pattern test failed

See Table A-14 for additional video (graphics) messages.

A-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Error Messages and Codes

A.9 Diskette Drive Error Messages (6xx-xx)

6xx-06

6xx-07

6xx-08

6xx-09

6xx-10

Message Probable Cause

Table A-8.

Diskette Drive Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

6xx-01

6xx-02

Exceeded maximum soft error limit

Exceeded maximum hard error limit

6xx-20

6xx-21

Previously exceeded max soft limit 6xx-22

Failed to get drive type

Failed to get change line status

6xx-03

6xx-04

6xx-05

Previously exceeded max hard limit 6xx-23

Failed to reset controller

Fatal error while reading

Fatal error while writing

Failed compare of R/W buffers

Failed to format a tract

Failed sector wrap test

6xx-24

6xx-25

6xx-26

6xx-27

6xx-28

--

Failed to clear change line status

Failed to set drive type in ID media

Failed to read diskette media

Failed to verify diskette media

Failed to read media in speed test

Failed speed limits

Failed write-protect test

--

600-xx = Diskette drive ID test

601-xx = Diskette drive format

602-xx = Diskette read test

603-xx = Diskette drive R/W compare test

604-xx = Diskette drive random seek test

605-xx = Diskette drive ID media

606-xx = Diskette drive speed test

607-xx = Diskette drive wrap test

608-xx = Diskette drive write-protect test

609-xx = Diskette drive reset controller test

610-xx = Diskette drive change line test

611-xx = Pri. diskette drive port addr. conflict

612-xx = Sec. diskette drive port addr. conflict

694-00 = Pin 34 not cut on 360-KB drive

697-00 = Diskette type error

698-00 = Drive speed not within limits

699-00 = Drive/media ID error (run Setup)

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-9

Error Messages and Codes

A.10 Serial Interface Error Messages (11xx-xx)

Message Probable Cause

1101-01

1101-02

UART DLAB bit failure

Line input or UART fault

1101-03

1101-04

1101-05

1101-06

1101-07

1101-08

1101-09

1101-10

1101-11

1101-12

Address line fault

Data line fault

UART cntrl. signal failure

UART THRE bit failure

UART Data RDY bit failure

UART TX/RX buffer failure

Interrupt circuit failure

COM1 set to invalid INT

COM2 set to invalid INT

Table A-9.

Serial Interface Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

DRVR/RCVR cntrl. signal failure

1101-13

1101-14

1109-01

1109-02

1109-03

1109-04

1109-05

1109-06

1150-xx

1151-xx

1152-xx

1155-xx

UART cntrl. signal interrupt failure

DRVR/RCVR data failure

Clock register initialization failure

Clock register rollover failure

Clock reset failure

Input line or clock failure

Address line fault

Data line fault

Comm port setup error (run Setup)

COM1 address conflict

COM2 address conflict

COM port address conflict

A-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Error Messages and Codes

A.11 Modem Communications Error Messages (12xx-xx)

Table A-10.

Modem Communications Error Messages

Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause

1201-XX

1201-01

1201-02

1201-03

1201-04

1201-05

Modem internal loopback test

UART DLAB bit failure

Line input or UART failure

Address line failure

Data line fault

UART control signal failure

1204-03

1204-04

1204-05

1204-06

1204-07

1204-08

Data block retry limit reached [4]

RX exceeded carrier lost limit

TX exceeded carrier lost limit

Time-out waiting for dial tone

1201-06

1201-07

1201-08

UART THRE bit failure

UART DATA READY bit failure

UART TX/RX buffer failure

1204-09

1204-10

1204-11

Dial number string too long

Modem time-out waiting for remote response

Modem exceeded maximum redial limit

Line quality prevented remote response

Modem time-out waiting for remote connection

Modem auto answer test 1201-09

1201-10

1201-11

1201-12

1201-13

Interrupt circuit failure

COM1 set to invalid inturrupt

COM2 set to invalid

1205-XX

1205-01

1205-02

DRVR/RCVR control signal failure 1205-03

UART control signal interrupt failure

DRVR/RCVR data failure

1205-04

1205-05

Time-out waiting for SYNC [5]

Time-out waiting for response [5]

Data block retry limit reached [5]

RX exceeded carrier lost limit

1201-14

1201-15

1201-16

1201-17

Modem detection failure

Modem ROM, checksum failure

Tone detect failure

1205-06

1205-07

1205-08

TX exceeded carrier lost limit

Time-out waiting for dial tone

Dial number string too long

Modem time-out waiting for remote response

1202-XX

1202-01

1202-02

1202-03

1202-11

1202-12

Modem internal test

Time-out waiting for SYNC [1]

1205-09

1205-10

Time-out waiting for response [1] 1205-11

Data block retry limit reached [1] 1206-XX

Time-out waiting for SYNC [2] 1206-17

Time-out waiting for response [2] 1210-XX

Modem exceeded maximum redial limit

Line quality prevented remote response

Modem time-out waiting for remote connection

Dial multi-frequency tone test

Tone detection failure

Modem direct connect test

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-11

Error Messages and Codes

Table A-10. (Continued)

Modem Communications Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

1202-13

Message

Data block retry limit reached [2] 1210-01

Probable Cause

Time-out waiting for SYNC [6]

1202-21

1202-22

1202-23

1203-XX

1203-01

1203-02

1203-03

Time-out waiting for SYNC [3]

Time-out waiting for response [3] 1210-03

Data block retry limit reached [3] 1210-04

Modem external termination test

1210-02

1210-05

Modem external TIP/RING failure

1210-06

Modem external data TIP/RING fail

1210-07

Modem line termination failure 1210-08

Time-out waiting for response [6]

Data block retry limit reached [6]

RX exceeded carrier lost limit

TX exceeded carrier lost limit

Time-out waiting for dial tone

Dial number string too long

1204-XX

1204-01

1204-02

Modem auto originate test

Time-out waiting for SYNC [4]

1210-09

1210-10

Time-out waiting for response [4] 1210-11

Modem time-out waiting for remote response

Modem exceeded maximum redial limit

Line quality prevented remote response

Modem time-out waiting for remote connection

NOTES:

[1] Local loopback mode

[2] Analog loopback originate mode

[3] Analog loopback answer mode

[4] Modem auto originate test

[5] Modem auto answer test

[6] Modem direct connect test

A.12 System Status Error Messages (16xx-xx)

Message

1601-xx

1611-xx

Table A-11

System Status Error Messages

Probable Cause

Temperature violation

Fan failure

A-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Error Messages and Codes

A.13 Hard Drive Error Messages (17xx-xx)

Message Probable Cause

17xx-01

17xx-02

17xx-03

Exceeded max. soft error limit

Exceeded max. Hard error limit

17xx-04

Table A-12

Hard Drive Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

Previously exceeded max. soft error limit

Previously exceeded max.hard error limit

17xx-51

17xx-52

17xx-53

17xx-54

Failed I/O read test

Failed file I/O compare test

Failed drive/head register test

Failed digital input register test

17xx-05

17xx-06

17xx-07

17xx-08

17xx-09

17xx-10

Failed to reset controller

Fatal error while reading

Fatal error while writing

Failed compare of R/W buffers

Failed to format a track

Failed diskette sector wrap during read

17xx-55

17xx-56

17xx-57

17xx-58

17xx-59

17xx-60

Cntlr. failed to deallocate bad sectors 17xx-62

Cylinder 1 error

Failed controller RAM diagnostics

Failed controller-to-drive diagnostics

Failed to write sector buffer

Failed to read sector buffer

Failed uncorrectable ECC error

17xx-19

17xx-40

17xx-41

17xx-42

17xx-43

17xx-44

17xx-45

Cylinder 0 error

Drive not ready

Failed to recalibrate drive

Failed to format a bad track

17xx-63

17xx-65

17xx-66

17xx-67

Failed correctable ECC error

Failed soft error rate

Exceeded max. bad sectors per track

Failed to initialize drive parameter

Failed to write long

Failed to read long

Failed to read drive size

17xx-46

17xx-47

17xx-48

17xx-49

17xx-50

Failed controller diagnostics

Failed to get drive parameters from

ROM

Invalid drive parameters from ROM

17xx-68

17xx-69

17xx-70

Failed to park heads

Failed to move hard drive table to

RAM

17xx-71

17xx-72

Failed to read media in file write test 17xx-73

Failed I/O write test --

Failed translate mode

Failed non-translate mode

Bad track limit exceeded

Previously exceeded bad track limit

--

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-13

Error Messages and Codes

NOTE: xx = 00, Hard drive ID test xx = 01, Hard drive format test xx = 02, Hard drive read test xx = 19, Hard drive power mode test xx = 20, SMART drive detects imminent failure xx = 21, SCSI hard drive imminent failure xx = 03, Hard drive read/write compare test xx = 24, Net work preparation test xx = 04, Hard drive random seek test xx = 05, Hard drive controller test xx = 36, Drive monitoring test xx = 71, Pri. IDE controller address conflict xx = 06, Hard drive ready test xx = 07, Hard drive recalibrate test xx = 72, Sec. IDE controller address conflict xx = 80, Disk 0 failure xx = 08, Hard drive format bad track test xx = 81, Disk 1 failure xx = 09, Hard drive reset controller test xx = 82, Pri. IDE controller failure xx = 10, Hard drive park head test xx = 14, Hard drive file write test xx = 90, Disk 0 failure xx = 91, Disk 1 failure xx = 15, Hard drive head select test xx = 92, Se. controller failure xx = 16, Hard drive conditional format test xx = 93, Sec. Controller or disk failure xx = 17, Hard drive ECC test xx = 99, Invalid hard drive type

A-14 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Error Messages and Codes

A.14 Hard Drive Error Messages (19xx-xx)

19xx-15

19xx-16

19xx-17

19xx-18

19xx-19

19xx-20

19xx-07

19xx-08

19xx-09

19xx-10

19xx-11

19xx-12

19xx-13

19xx-14

Message Probable Cause

19xx-01

19xx-02

Drive not installed

Cartridge not installed

Table A-13

Hard Drive Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

19xx-21

19xx-22

Got servo pulses second time but not first

Never got to EOT after servo check

19xx-03

19xx-04

19xx-05

19xx-06

Tape motion error

Drive busy erro

Track seek error

Tape write-protect error

19xx-23

19xx-24

19xx-25

19xx-26

Change line unset

Write-protect error

Unable to erase cartridge

Cannot identify drive

Tape already Servo Written

Unable to Servo Write

Unable to format

Format mode error

Drive recalibration error

Tape not Servo Written

Tape not formatted

Drive time-out error

19xx-27

19xx-28

19xx-30

19xx-31

19xx-32

19xx-33

19xx-34

19xx-35

Drive not compatible with controller

Format gap error

Exception bit not set

Unexpected drive status

Device fault

Illegal command

No data detected

Power-on reset occurred

Sensor error flag

Block locate (block ID) error

Soft error limit exceeded

Hard error limit exceeded

Write (probably ID ) error

NEC fatal error

19xx-36

19xx-37

19xx-38

19xx-39

19xx-40

19xx-91

Failed to set FLEX format mode

Failed to reset FLEX format mode

Data mismatch on directory track

Data mismatch on track 0

Failed self-test

Power lost during test

1900-xx = Tape ID test failed

1901-xx = Tape servo write failed

1902-xx = Tape format failed

1903-xx = Tape drive sensor test failed

1904-xx = Tape BOT/EOT test failed

1905-xx = Tape read test failed

1906-xx = Tape R/W compare test failed

1907-xx = Tape write-protect failed

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-15

Error Messages and Codes

A.15 Video (Graphics) Error Messages (24xx-xx)

2406-01

2407-01

2408-01

2409-01

2410-01

2411-01

2412-01

2414-01

Message Probable Cause

Table A-14

Video (Graphics) Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

2402-01

2403-01

2404-01

2405-01

Video memory test failed

Video attribute test failed

Video character set test failed

80x25 mode, 9x14 cell test failed

2418-02

2419-01

2420-01

2421-01

EGA shadow RAM test failed

EGA ROM checksum test failed

EGA attribute test failed

640x200 mode test failed

2416-01

2417-01

2417-02

2417-03

2417-04

2418-01

80x25 mode, 8x8 cell test failed

40x25 mode test failed

320x200 mode color set 0 test failed 2424-01

320x200 mode color set 1 test failed 2425-01

640x200 mode test failed

Screen memory page test failed

Gray scale test failed

White screen test failed

Noise pattern test failed

Lightpen text test failed, no response

Lightpen text test failed, invalid response

2422-01

2423-01

2431-01

2432-01

2448-01

2451-01

2456-01

2458-xx

2468-xx

Lightpen graphics test failed, no resp.

2477-xx

Lightpen graphics tst failed, invalid resp.

2478-xx

EGA memory test failed 2480-xx

640x350 16-color set test failed

640x350 64-color set test failed

EGA Mono. text mode test failed

EGA Mono. graphics mode test failed

640x480 graphics mode test failed

320x200 256-color set test failed

Advanced VGA controller test failed

132-column AVGA test failed

AVGA 256-color test failed

AVGA BitBLT test failed

AVGA DAC test failed

AVGA data path test failed

AVGA BitBLT test failed

AVGA linedraw test failed

A.16 Audio Error Messages (3206-xx)

Message

3206-xx

Table A-15

Audio Error Messages

Probable Cause

Audio subsystem internal error

A-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Error Messages and Codes

A.17 DVD/CD-ROM Error Messages (33xx-xx)

Message

3301-xx

3305-xx

Table A-16

DVD/CD-ROM Error Messages

Probable Cause

Drive test failed

Seek test failed

A.18 Network Interface Error Messages (60xx-xx)

Table A-17

Network Interface Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

6000-xx Pointing device interface error

Message

6054-xx

Probable Cause

Token ring configuration test failed

6014-xx

6016-xx

6028-xx

6029-xx

Ethernet configuration test failed

Ethernet reset test failed

6056-xx

6068-xx

Ethernet int. loopback test failed 6069-xx

Ethernet ext. loopback test failed 6089-xx

Token ring reset test failed

Token ring int. loopback test failed

Token ring ext. loopback test failed

Token ring open

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-17

Error Messages and Codes

A.19 SCSI Interface Error Messages (65xx-xx, 66xx-xx,

67xx-xx)

6nyy-09

6nyy-10

6nyy-11

6nyy-12

6nyy-13

6nyy-14

6nyy-15

6nyy-16

Message

6nyy-02

6nyy-03

6nyy-05

6nyy-06

6nyy-07

6nyy-08

6nyy-17

6nyy-18

6nyy-21

6nyy-24

6nyy-25

6nyy-30

6nyy-31

6nyy-32 n = 5, Hard drive

= 6, CD-ROM drive

= 7, Tape drive yy = 00, ID

= 03, Power check

= 05, Read

= 06, SA/Media

= 08, Controller

= 23, Random read

= 28, Media load/unload

Probable Cause

Drive not installed

Media not installed

Seek failure

Drive timed out

Drive busy

Drive already reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Media soft error

Drive not ready

Media error

Drive hardware error

Illegal drive command

Media was changed

Tape write-protected

No data detected

Drive command aborted

Media hard error

Table A-18

SCSI Interface Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

Reserved

Controller timed out

Unrecoverable error

Controller/drive not connected

6nyy-33

6nyy-34

6nyy-35

6nyy-36

6nyy-39

6nyy-40

6nyy-41

6nyy-42

6nyy-43

6nyy-44

6nyy-50

6nyy-51

6nyy-52

6nyy-53

6nyy-54

6nyy-60

6nyy-61

6nyy-65

6nyy-90

6nyy-91

6nyy-92

6nyy-99

Illegal controller command

Invalid SCSI bus phase

Invalid SCSI bus phase

Invalid SCSI bus phase

Error status from drive

Drive timed out

SSI bus stayed busy

ACK/REQ lines bad

ACK did not deassert

Parity error

Data pins bad

Data line 7 bad

MSG, C/D, or I/O lines bad

BSY never went busy

BSY stayed busy

Controller CONFIG-1 register fault

Controller CONFIG-2 register fault

Media not unloaded

Fan failure

Over temperature condition

Side panel not installed

Autoloader reported tape not loaded properly

A-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Error Messages and Codes

A.20 Pointing Device Interface Error Messages

(8601-xx)

Table A-19

Pointing Device Interface Error Messages

Message Probable Cause

8601-01 Mouse ID fails

Message

8601-07

Probable Cause

Right block not selected

8601-02

8601-03

8601-04

8601-05

8601-06

Left mouse button is inoperative

Left mouse button is stuck closed

Right mouse button is inoperative 8601-10

Right mouse button is stuck closed 8602-xx

Left block not selected

8601-08

8601-09

--

Timeout occurred

Mouse loopback test failed

Pointing device is inoperative

I/F test failed

--

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-19

Error Messages and Codes

A-20 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

B

ASCII Character Set

B.1 Introduction

This appendix lists, in Table B-1, the 256-character ASCII code set including the decimal and hexadecimal values. All ASCII symbols may be called while in DOS or using standard text-mode editors by using the combination keystroke of holding the Alt key and using the

Numeric Keypad to enter the decimal value of the symbol. The extended ASCII characters

(decimals 128-255) can only be called using the Alt + Numeric Keypad keys.

✎

Regarding keystrokes, refer to notes at the end of the table. Applications may interpret multiple keystroke accesses differently or ignore them completely.

0A

0B

0C

0D

06

07

08

09

0E

0F

10

11

02

03

04

05

Hex

00

01

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

14

15

16

17

4

5

2

3

Dec

0

1

™ l m

©

®

ß

Symbol

Blank

4

3

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

46

47

48

49

34

35

36

37

Dec

32

33

2A

2B

2C

2D

26

27

28

29

2E

2F

30

31

22

23

24

25

Hex

20

21

.

/

-

`

0

1

*

+

)

(

&

‘

$

%

Table B-1.

ASCII Character Set

Symbol Dec Hex

Space

!

“

#

64

65

66

67

40

41

42

43

72

73

74

75

68

69

70

71

48

49

4A

4B

44

45

46

47

76

77

78

79

80

81

4C

4D

4E

4F

50

51

L

M

J

K

H

I

F

G

P

Q

N

O

Symbol

@

A

D

E

B

C

6A

6B

6C

6D

66

67

68

69

6E

6F

70

71

62

63

64

65

Hex

60

61

106

107

108

109

102

103

104

105

110

111

112

113

98

99

100

101

Dec

96

97 l m j k

I h f g p q n o

Symbol

‘ a d e b c

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 B-1

ASCII Character Set

8B

8C

8D

8E

87

88

89

8A

8F

90

83

84

85

86

1F

80

81

82

1B

1C

1D

1E

17

18

19

1A

Hex

12

13

14

15

16

139

140

141

142

135

136

137

138

143

144

131

132

133

134

31

128

129

130

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

Dec

18

19

20

21

22

Symbol

×

§

0

!!

¶

Ø

Æ

×

¦

¨

AB

AC

AD

AE

A7

A8

A9

AA

AF

B0

A3

A4

A5

A6

3F

A0

A1

A2

3B

3C

3D

3E

37

38

39

3A

Hex

32

33

34

35

36

171

172

173

174

167

168

169

170

175

176

163

164

165

166

63

160

161

162

59

60

61

62

55

56

57

58

Dec

50

51

52

53

54

î

ï

ë

è

ç

ê

à

å

Å

É

ì

Ä

â

ä

ü

é t

Ç

´ s

¡

«

»

¬

½

¼

Ñ

ª

ú

ñ

º

¿

í

ó

?

á

=

>

;

<

9

:

7

8

5

6

3

4

Table B-1. (Continued)

ASCII Character Set

Symbol

2

Dec

82

Hex

52

87

88

89

90

83

84

85

86

57

58

59

5A

53

54

55

56

199

200

201

202

195

196

197

198

95

192

193

194

91

92

93

94

C7

C8

C9

CA

C3

C4

C5

C6

5F

C0

C1

C2

5B

5C

5D

5E

203

204

205

206

207

208

CB

CC

CD

CE

CF

D0

]

^

[

\

_

Y

Z

W

X

Symbol

R

U

V

S

T

EB

EC

ED

EE

E7

E8

E9

EA

EF

F0

E3

E4

E5

E6

7F

E0

E1

E2

7B

7C

7D

7E

77

78

79

7A

Hex

72

73

74

75

76

235

236

237

238

231

232

233

234

239

240

227

228

229

230

127

224

225

226

123

124

125

126

119

120

121

122

Dec

114

115

116

117

118

}

~

{

|

[1] y z w x

Symbol r u v s t

ß

µ

B-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

ASCII Character Set

154

155

156

157

150

151

152

153

158

159

Dec

145

146

147

148

149

9A

9B

9C

9D

96

97

98

99

9E

9F

Hex

91

92

93

94

95

£

¥

Ü

¢

ÿ

Ö

û

ù

Symbol

æ

ö

ò

Æ

ô

ƒ

BA

BB

BC

BD

B6

B7

B8

B9

BE

BF

Hex

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

186

187

188

189

182

183

184

185

190

191

Dec

177

178

179

180

181

Table B-1. (Continued)

ASCII Character Set

Symbol Dec

209

Hex

D1

210

211

212

213

D2

D3

D4

D5

218

219

220

221

214

215

216

217

222

223

DA

DB

DC

DD

D6

D7

D8

D9

DE

DF

Symbol Symbol

±

÷

°

²

·

·

Blank

NOTES:

[1] Symbol not displayed.

Keystroke Guide:

Dec #

0

Keystroke(s)

Ctrl 2

1-26

27

28

29

Ctrl A thru Z respectively

Ctrl [

Ctrl

Ctrl ]

30

31

32

33-43

44-47

48-57

58

59

Ctrl 6

Ctrl -

Space Bar

Shift and key w/corresponding symbol

Key w/corresponding symbol

Key w/corresponding symbol, numerical keypad w/Num Lock active

Shift and key w/corresponding symbol

Key w/corresponding symbol

60

61

62-64

65-90

91-93

94, 95

96

97-126

127

128-255

Shift and key w/corresponding symbol

Key w/corresponding symbol

Shift and key w/corresponding symbol

Shift and key w/corresponding symbol or key w/corresponding symbol and Caps Lock active

Key w/corresponding symbol

Shift and key w/corresponding symbol

Key w/corresponding symbol

Key w/corresponding symbol or Shift and key w/corresponding symbol and Caps Lock active

Ctrl -

Alt and decimal digit(s) of desired character

FA

FB

FC

FD

F8

F9

F6

F7

FE

FF

Hex

F1

F4

F5

F2

F3

250

251

252

253

246

247

248

249

254

255

Dec

241

242

243

244

245

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 B-3

ASCII Character Set

B-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

C

Keyboard

C.1 Introduction

This appendix describes the HP keyboard that is included as standard with the system unit. The keyboard complies with the industry-standard classification of an “enhanced keyboard” and includes a separate cursor control key cluster, twelve “function” keys, and enhanced programmability for additional functions.

This appendix covers the following keyboard types:

■

■

Standard enhanced keyboard.

Space-Saver Windows-version keyboard featuring additional keys for specific support of the

Windows operating system.

■ Easy Access keyboard with additional buttons for internet accessibility functions.

Only one type of keyboard is supplied with each system. Other types may be available as an option.

✎

This appendix discusses only the keyboard unit. The keyboard interface is a function of the system unit and is discussed in Chapter 5, Input/Output Interfaces.

C.2 Keystroke Processing

A functional block diagram of the keystroke processing elements is shown in Figure C-1. Power

(+5 VDC) is obtained from the system through the PS/2-type interface. The keyboard uses a

Z86C14 (or equivalent) microprocessor. The Z86C14 scans the key matrix drivers every 10 ms for pressed keys while at the same time monitoring communications with the keyboard interface of the system unit. When a key is pressed, a Make code is generated. A Break code is generated when the key is released. The Make and Break codes are collectively referred to as scan codes.

All keys generate Make and Break codes with the exception of the Pause key, which generates a

Make code only.

C-1 Technical Reference Guide 361834-002

Keyboard

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Keyswitch

Matrix

Matrix

Drivers

Matrix

Receivers

Keyboard

Processor

Data/

CLK

Keyboard

Interface

(System Unit)

Figure C-1. Keystroke Processing Elements, Block Diagram

When the system is turned on, the keyboard processor generates a Power-On Reset (POR) signal after a period of 150 ms to 2 seconds. The keyboard undergoes a Basic Assurance Test (BAT) that checks for shorted keys and basic operation of the keyboard processor. The BAT takes from

300 to 500 ms to complete.

If the keyboard fails the BAT, an error code is sent to the CPU and the keyboard is disabled until an input command is received. After successful completion of the POR and BAT, a completion code (AAh) is sent to the CPU and the scanning process begins.

The keyboard processor includes a 16-byte FIFO buffer for holding scan codes until the system is ready to receive them. Response and typematic codes are not buffered. If the buffer is full (16 bytes held) a 17th byte of a successive scan code results in an overrun condition and the overrun code replaces the scan code byte and any additional scan code data (and the respective key strokes) are lost. Multi-byte sequences must fit entirely into the buffer before the respective keystroke can be registered.

C-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Keyboard

C.2.1 PS/2-Type Keyboard Transmissions

The PS/2-type keyboard sends two main types of data to the system; commands (or responses to system commands) and keystroke scan codes. Before the keyboard sends data to the system

(specifically, to the 8042-type logic within the system), the keyboard verifies the clock and data lines to the system. If the clock signal is low (0), the keyboard recognizes the inhibited state and loads the data into a buffer. Once the inhibited state is removed, the data is sent to the system.

Keyboard-to-system transfers (in the default mode) consist of 11 bits as shown in Figure C-2.

Tcy

Tcl

Tch

Clock

Data

Start

Bit

Th-b-t

(LSb)

Data

0

Data

1

Data

2

Data

3

Data

4

Data

5

Data

6

(MSb)

Data

7

Parity

Bit

Stop

Bit

Parameter

Tcy (clock cycle)

Tcl (clock low)

Tch (clock high)

Minimum Nominal

60 us

30 us

30 us

Th-b-t (high-before-transmit) --

--

41 us

--

20 us

Maximum

80 us

50 us

40 us

--

Figure C-2. PS/2 Keyboard-To-System Transmission, Timing Diagram

The system can halt keyboard transmission by setting the clock signal low. The keyboard checks the clock line every 60 µs to verify the state of the signal. If a low is detected, the keyboard will finish the current transmission if the rising edge of the clock pulse for the parity bit has not occurred. The system uses the same timing relationships during reads (typically with slightly reduced time periods).

The enhanced keyboard has three operating modes:

■

■

■

Mode 1—PC-XT compatible

Mode 2—PC-AT compatible (default)

Mode 3—Select mode (keys are programmable as to make-only, break-only, typematic)

Modes can be selected by the user or set by the system. Mode 2 is the default mode. Each mode produces a different set of scan codes. When a key is pressed, the keyboard processor sends that key's make code to the 8042 logic of the system unit. The When the key is released, a release code is transmitted as well (except for the Pause key, which produces only a make code). The

8042-type logic of the system unit responds to scan code reception by asserting IRQ1, which is processed by the interrupt logic and serviced by the CPU with an interrupt service routine. The service routine takes the appropriate action based on which key was pressed.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-3

Keyboard

C.2.2 USB-Type Keyboard Transmissions

The USB-type keyboard sends essentially the same information to the system that the PS/2 keyboard does except that the data receives additional NRZI encoding and formatting (prior to leaving the keyboard) to comply with the USB I/F specification (discussed in chapter 5 of this guide).

Packets received at the system's USB I/F and decoded as originating from the keyboard result in an SMI being generated. An SMI handler routine is invoked that decodes the data and transfers the information to the 8042 keyboard controller where normal (legacy) keyboard processing takes place.

C.2.3 Keyboard Layouts

Figures C-3 through C-8 show the key layouts for keyboards shipped with HPsystems. Actual styling details including location of the HP logo as well as the numbers lock, caps lock, and scroll lock LEDs may vary.

C.2.3.1 Standard Enhanced Keyboards

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31

39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 30

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71

75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85

92 93 94 95

86

96

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

52 53 54 55 56 57

58

72 73 74

97

87

98 99

88 89 90

100 101

91

Figure C-3. U.S. English (101-Key) Keyboard Key Positions

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31

39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51

71

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 103

75 104 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85

92 93 94 95

86

96

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

52 53 54 55 56 57

58

72 73 74

97

87

98 99

88 89 90

100 101

91

Figure C-4. National (102-Key) Keyboard Key Positions

C-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Keyboard

C.2.3.2 Windows Enhanced Keyboards

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31

39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71

30

92

75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85

110 93 94 95 111 112

86

96

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

52 53 54 55 56 57

72 73 74

97

87

98 99

88 89 90

100 101

58

91

Figure C-5. U.S. English Windows (101W-Key) Keyboard Key Positions

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31

39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51

71

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 103

75 104 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85

92 110 93 94 95 111 112

86

96

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

52 53 54 55 56 57

58

72 73 74

97

87

98 99

88 89 90

100 101

91

Figure C-6. National Windows (102W-Key) Keyboard Key Positions

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-5

Keyboard

C.2.3.3 Easy Access Keyboard

The Easy Access keyboard is a Windows Enhanced-type keyboard that includes special buttons allowing quick internet navigation. The Easy Access Keyboard uses the PS/2-type connection.

Btn 1 Btn 2 Btn 3 Btn 4 Btn 5 Btn 6 Btn 7 Btn 8

✎

Main key positions same as Windows Enhanced (Figures C-5 or C-6).

Figure C-7. 8-Button Easy Access Keyboard Layout

C-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Keyboard

C.2.4 Keys

All keys generate a Make code (when pressed) and a Break code (when released) with the exception of the Pause key (pos. 16), which produces a Make code only. All keys with the exception of the Pause and Easy Access keys are also typematic, although the typematic action of the Shift, Ctrl, Alt, Num Lock, Scroll Lock, Caps Lock , and Ins keys is suppressed by the BIOS. Typematic keys, when held down longer than 500 ms, send the Make code repetitively at a 10-12 Hz rate until the key is released. If more than one key is held down, the last key pressed will be typematic.

C.2.4.1 Special Single-Keystroke Functions

The following keys provide the intended function in most applications and environments.

Caps Lock —The Caps Lock key (pos. 59), when pressed and released, invokes a BIOS routine that turns on the caps lock LED and shifts into upper case key positions 40-49, 60-68, and 76-82.

When pressed and released again, these keys revert to the lower case state and the LED is turned off. Use of the Shift key will reverse which state these keys are in based on the Caps Lock key.

Num Lock —The Num Lock key (pos. 32), when pressed and released, invokes a BIOS routine that turns on the num lock LED and shifts into upper case key positions 55-57, 72-74, 88-90,

100, and 101. When pressed and released again, these keys revert to the lower case state and the

LED is turned off.

The following keys provide special functions that require specific support by the application.

Print Scrn —The Print Scrn (pos. 14) key can, when pressed, generate an interrupt that initiates a print routine. This function may be inhibited by the application.

Scroll Lock —The Scroll Lock key (pos. 15) when pressed and released, invokes a BIOS routine that turns on the scroll lock LED and inhibits movement of the cursor. When pressed and released again, the LED is turned off and the function is removed. This keystroke is always serviced by the BIOS (as indicated by the LED) but may be inhibited or ignored by the application.

Pause —The Pause (pos. 16) key, when pressed, can be used to cause the keyboard interrupt to loop, i.e., wait for another key to be pressed. This can be used to momentarily suspend an operation. The key that is pressed to resume operation is discarded. This function may be ignored by the application.

The Esc , Fn (function), Insert , Home , Page Up / Down, Delete , and End keys operate at the discretion of the application software.

C.2.4.2 Multi-Keystroke Functions

Shift —The Shift key (pos. 75/86), when held down, produces a shift state (upper case) for keys in positions 17-29, 30, 39-51, 60-70, and 76-85 as long as the Caps Lock key (pos. 59) is toggled off. If the Caps Lock key is toggled on, then a held Shift key produces the lower

(normal) case for the identified pressed keys. The Shift key also reverses the Num Lock state of key positions 55-57, 72, 74, 88-90, 100, and 101.

Ctrl —The Ctrl keys (pos. 92/96) can be used in conjunction with keys in positions 1-13, 16,

17-34, 39-54, 60-71, and 76-84. The application determines the actual function. Both Ctrl key positions provide identical functionality. The pressed combination of Ctrl and Break (pos. 16) results in the generation of BIOS function INT 1Bh. This software interrupt provides a method of exiting an application and generally halts execution of the current program.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-7

Keyboard

Alt —The Alt keys (pos. 93/95) can be used in conjunction with the same keys available for use with the Ctrl keys with the exception that position 14 ( SysRq) is available instead of position 16

( Break ). The Alt key can also be used in conjunction with the numeric keypad keys (pos. 55-57,

72-74, and 88-90) to enter the decimal value of an ASCII character code from 1-255. The application determines the actual function of the keystrokes. Both Alt key positions provide identical functionality. The combination keystroke of Alt and SysRq results in software interrupt 15h, AX=8500h being executed. It is up to the application to use or not use this BIOS function.

The Ctrl and Alt keys can be used together in conjunction with keys in positions 1-13, 17-34,

39-54, 60-71, and 76-84. The Ctrl and Alt key positions used and the sequence in which they are pressed make no difference as long as they are held down at the time the third key is pressed. The

Ctrl , Alt , and Delete keystroke combination (required twice if in the Windows environment) initiates a system reset (warm boot) that is handled by the BIOS.

C.2.4.3 Windows Keystrokes

Windows-enhanced keyboards include three additional key positions. Key positions 110 and 111

(marked with the Windows logo ) have the same functionality and are used by themselves or in combination with other keys to perform specific “hot-key” type functions for the Windows operating system. The defined functions of the Windows logo keys are listed as follows:

Keystroke

Window Logo

Function

Open Start menu

Window Logo + F1

Window Logo + TAB

Window Logo + E

Window Logo + F

Display pop-up menu for the selected object

Activate next task bar button

Explore my computer

Find document

Window Logo + CTRL + F

Window Logo + M

Shift + Window Logo + M

Window Logo + R

Find computer

Minimize all

Undo minimize all

Display Run dialog box

Window Logo + PAUSE

Window Logo + 0-9

Perform system function

Reserved for OEM use (see following text)

The combination keystroke of the Window Logo + 1-0 keys are reserved for OEM use for auxiliary functions (speaker volume, monitor brightness, password, etc.).

Key position 112 (marked with an application window icon ) is used in combination with other keys for invoking Windows application functions.

C-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Keyboard

C.2.4.4 Easy Access Keystrokes

The Easy Access keyboards(Figures C-7) include additional keys (also referred to as buttons) used to streamline internet access and navigation.

These buttons, which can be re-programmed to provide other functions, have the default functionality described below:

8-Button Easy Access Keyboard:

Button # Description Default Function

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Go to favorite web site Customer web site of choice

Go to AltaVista AltaVista web site

Search

Check Email

AltaVista search engine

Launches user Email

Business Community

Market Monitor

Meeting Center

News/PC Lock

Industry specification info

Launches Bloomberg market monitor

Links to user’s project center

News retrieval service

All buttons may be re-programmed by the user through the Easy Access utility.

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-9

Keyboard

C.2.5 Keyboard Commands

Table C-1 lists the commands that the keyboard can send to the system (specifically, to the

8042-type logic).

Table C-1.

Keyboard-to-System Commands

Value Description Command

Key Detection Error/Over/run 00h [1]

FFh [2]

Indicates to the system that a switch closure couldn’t be identified.

BAT Completion

BAT Failure

Echo

Acknowledge (ACK)

Resend

Keyboard ID

AAh Indicates to the system that the BAT has been successful.

Indicates failure of the BAT by the keyboard.

FCh

EEh

FAh

Indicates that the Echo command was received by the keyboard.

Issued by the keyboard as a response to valid system inputs (except the Echo and Resend commands).

Issued by the keyboard following an invalid input.

FEh

83ABh Upon receipt of the Read ID command from the system, the keyboard issues the ACK command followed by the two IDS bytes.

Note:

[1] Modes 2 and 3.

[2] Mode 1 only.

C-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Keyboard

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

F12

F3

F4

F5

F6

Esc

F1

F2

8

9

10

11

12

13

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

C.2.6 Scan Codes

The scan codes generated by the keyboard processor are determined by the mode the keyboard is operating in.

■ Mode 1: In Mode 1 operation, the keyboard generates scan codes compatible with

8088-/8086-based systems. To enter Mode 1, the scan code translation function of the keyboard controller must be disabled. Since translation is not performed, the scan codes generated in Mode 1 are identical to the codes required by BIOS. Mode 1 is initiated by sending command F0h with the 01h option byte. Applications can obtain system codes and status information by using BIOS function INT 16h with AH=00h, 01h, and 02h.

■ Mode 2: Mode 2 is the default mode for keyboard operation. In this mode, the 8042 logic translates the make codes from the keyboard processor into the codes required by the BIOS.

This mode was made necessary with the development of the Enhanced III keyboard, which includes additional functions over earlier standard keyboards. Applications should use BIOS function INT 16h, with AH=10h, 11h, and 12h for obtaining codes and status data. In Mode

2, the keyboard generates the Break code, a two-byte sequence that consists of a Make code immediately preceded by F0h (i.e., Break code for 0Eh is “F0h 0Eh”).

■ Mode 3: Mode 3 generates a different scan code set from Modes 1 and 2. Code translation must be disabled since translation for this mode cannot be done.

NOTES:

Table C-2.

Keyboard Scan Codes

Make/Break Codes (Hex)

Key

Pos.

Legend Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

41/C1

42/C2

43/C3

44/C4

57/D7

58/D8

01/81

3B/BB

3C/BC

3D/BD

3E/BE

3F/BF

40/C0

76/F0 76

05/F0 05

06/F0 06

04/F0 04

0C/F0 0C

03/F0 03

0B/F0 0B

83/F0 83

0A/F0 0A

01/FO 01

09/F0 09

78/F0 78

07/F0 07

37/na

3F/na

47/na

4F/na

56/na

5E/na

08/na

07/na

0F/na

17/na

1F/na

27/na

2F/na

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-11

Keyboard

Table C-2. (Continued)

Keyboard Scan Codes

Make/Break Codes (Hex)

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

Key

Pos.

Legend Mode 1

14

15

16

33

34

Mode 2 Mode 3

Pause

2

3

`

1

6

7

4

5

-

0

8

9

=

\

Print Scrn E0 2A E0 37/E0 B7 E0 AA

E0 37/E0 B7 [1] [2]

54/84 [3]

Scroll Lock 46/C6

Home

Page Up

E1 1D 45 E1 9D C5/na

E0 46 E0 C6/na [3]

29/A9

02/82

03/83

04/84

05/85

06/86

07/87

08/88

09/89

0A/8A

0B/8B

0C/8C

0D/8D

2B/AB

E0 2A E0 7C/E0 F0 7C E0 F0 12

E0 7C/E0 F0 7C [1] [2]

84/F0 84 [3]

7E/F0 7E

E1 14 77 E1 F0 14 F0 77/na

E0 7E E0 F0 7E/na [3]

0E/F0 E0

16/F0 16

1E/F0 1E

26/F0 26

25/F0 25

2E/F0 2E

36/F0 36

3D/F0 3D

3E/F0 3E

46/F0 46

45/F0 45

4E/F0 4E

55/F0 55

5D/F0 5D

Backspace 0E/8E

Insert E0 52/E0 D2

E0 AA E0 52/E0 D2 E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 52/E0 D2 E0 AA [6]

66/F0 66

E0 70/E0 F0 70

E0 F0 12 E0 70/E0 F0 70 E0 12 [5]

E0 12 E0 70/E0 F0 70 E0 F0 12 [6]

57/na

5F/na

62/na

0E/F0 0E

46/F0 46

1E/F0 1E

26/F0 26

25/F0 25

2E/F0 2E

36/F0 36

3D/F0 3D

3E/F0 3E

46/F0 46

45/F0 45

4E/F0 4E

55/F0 55

5C/F0 5C

66/F0 66

67/na

E0 47/E0 D2

E0 AA E0 52/E0 D2 E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 47/E0 C7 E0 AA [6]

E0 6C/E0 F0 6C

E0 F0 12 E0 6C/E0 F0 6C E0 12 [5]

E0 12 E0 6C/E0 F0 6C E0 F0 12 [6]

6E/na

E0 49/E0 C7

E0 AA E0 49/E0 C9 E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 49/E0 C9 E0 AA [6]

E0 7D/E0 F0 7D

E0 F0 12 E0 7D/E0 F0 7D E0 12 [5]

E0 12 E0 7D/E0 F0 7D E0 F0 12 [6]

6F/na

C-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Keyboard

Table C-2. (Continued)

Keyboard Scan Codes

Make/Break Codes (Hex)

55

56

57

48

49

50

51

52

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

37

38

39

Key

Pos.

Legend Mode 1

35

36

53

54

Mode 2 Mode 3

O

P

I

U

T

Y

E

R

-

Tab

Q

W

Num Lock 45/C5

/ E0 35/E0 B5

E0 AA E0 35/E0 B5 E0 2A [1]

77/F0 77 76/na

E0 4A/E0 F0 4A

E0 F0 12 E0 4A/E0 F0 4A E0 12 [1]

77/na

* 37/B7 7C/F0 7C 7E/na

4A/CA

0F/8F

10/90

11/91

7B/F0 7B

0D/F0 0D

15/F0 15

1D/F0 1D

84/na

0D/na

15/na

1D/F0 1D

12/92

13/93

14/94

15/95

16/96

17/97

18/98

19/99

24/F0 24

2D/F0 2D

2C/F0 2C

35/F0 35

3C/F0 3C

43/F0 43

44/F0 44

4D/F0 4D

24/F0 24

2D/F0 2D

2C/F0 2C

35/F0 35

3C/F0 3C

43/F0 43

44/F0 44

4D/F0 4D

]

[

Delete

End

1A/9A

1B/9B

54/F0 54

5B/F0 5B

54/F0 54

5B/F0 5B

E0 53/E0 D3

E0 AA E0 53/E0 D3 E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 53/E0 D3 E0 AA [6]

E0 71/E0 F0 71

E0 F0 12 E0 71/E0 F0 71 E0 12 [5]

E0 12 E0 71/E0 F0 71 E0 F0 12 [6]

64/F0 64

65/F0 65 E0 4F/E0 CF

E0 AA E0 4F/E0 CF E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 4F/E0 CF E0 AA [6]

E0 69/E0 F0 69

E0 F0 12 E0 69/E0 F0 69 E0 12 [5]

E0 12 E0 69/E0 F0 69 E0 F0 12 [6]

8

9

Page Down E0 51/E0 D1

E0 AA E0 51/E0 D1 E0 2A [4]

E0 @a E0 51/E0 D1 E0 AA [6]

E0 7A/E0 F0 7A

E0 F0 12 E0 7A/E0 F0 7A E0 12 [5]

E0 12 E0 7A/E0 F0 7A E0 F0 12 [6]

6D/F0 6D

7 47/C7 [6] 6C/F0 6C [6] 6C/na [6]

48/C8 [6]

49/C9 [6]

75/F0 75 [6]

7D/F0 7D [6]

75/na [6]

7D/na [6]

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-13

Keyboard

Key

Pos.

Legend Mode 1

78

79

80

81

74

75

76

77

82

83

84

70

71

72

73

66

67

68

69

62

63

64

65

58

59

60

61

.

,

M

B

N

C

V

Z

X

6

Shift (left)

4

5

‘

Enter

;

L

J

K

G

H

D

F

A

S

+ 4E/CE [6]

Caps Lock 3A/BA

1E/9E

1F/9F

20/A0

21/A1

22/A2

23/A3

24/A4

25/A5

26/A6

27/A7

28/A8

1C/9C

4B/CB [6]

4C/CC [6]

4D/CD [6]

2A/AA

2C/AC

2D/AD

2E/AE

2F/AF

30/B0

31/B1

32/B2

33/B3

34/B4

Table C-2. (Continued)

Keyboard Scan Codes

Make/Break Codes (Hex)

Mode 2

74/F0 74 [6]

12/F0 12

1A/F0 1A

22/F0 22

21/F0 21

2A/F0 2A

32/F0 32

31/F0 31

3A/F0 3A

41/F0 41

49/F0 49

79/F0 79 [6]

58/F0 58

1C/F0 1C

1B/F0 1B

23/F0 23

2B/F0 2B

34/F0 34

33/F0 33

3B/F0 3B

42/F0 42

4B/F0 4B

4C/F0 4C

52/F0 52

5A/F0 5A

6B/F0 6B [6]

73/F0 73 [6]

C-14 361834-002

Mode 3

74/na [6]

12/F0 12

1A/F0 1A

22/F0 22

21/F0 21

2A/F0 2A

32/F0 32

31/F0 31

3A/F0 3A

41/F0 41

49/F0 49

3B/F0 3B

42/F0 42

4B/F0 4B

4C/F0 4C

52/F0 52

5A/F0 5A

6B/na [6]

73/na [6]

7C/F0 7C

14/F0 14

1C/F0 1C

1B/F0 1B

23/F0 23

2B/F0 2B

34/F0 34

33/F0 33

Technical Reference Guide

Table C-2. (Continued)

Keyboard Scan Codes

Make/Break Codes (Hex)

Key

Pos.

Legend Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100 0

101 .

102 na

103 na

104 na

1

2

3

Enter

/ 35/B5

Shift (right) 36/B6

4A/F0 4A

59/F0 59

E0 48/E0 C8

E0 AA E0 48/E0 C8 E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 48/E0 C8 E0 AA [6]

E0 75/E0 F0 75

E0 F0 12 E0 75/E0 F0 75 E0 12 [5]

E0 12 E0 75/E0 F0 75 E0 F0 12 [6]

4F/CF [6] 69/F0 69 [6]

50/D0 [6]

51/D1 [6]

E0 1C/E0 9C

72/F0 72 [6]

7A/F0 7A [6]

E0 5A/F0 E0 5A

4A/F0 4A

59/F0 59

63/F0 63

Ctrl (left)

Alt (left)

(Space)

Alt (right)

1D/9D

38/B8

39/B9

E0 38/E0 B8

14/F0 14

11/F0 11

29/F0 29

E0 11/F0 E0 11

69/na [6]

72/na [6]

7A/na [6]

79/F0

79[6]

11/F0 11

19/F0 19

29/F0 29

39/na

58/na

61/F0 61

Ctrl (right) E0 1D/E0 9D E0 14/F0 E0 14

E0 4B/E0 CB

E0 AA E0 4B/E0 CB E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 4B/E0 CB E0 AA [6]

E0 6B/Eo F0 6B

E0 F0 12 E0 6B/E0 F0 6B E0 12[5]

E0 12 E0 6B/E0 F0 6B E0 F0 12[6]

E0 50/E0 D0

E0 AA E0 50/E0 D0 E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 50/E0 D0 E0 AA [6]

E0 72/E0 F0 72

E0 F0 12 E0 72/E0 F0 72 E0 12[5]

E0 12 E0 72/E0 F0 72 E0 F0 12[6]

E0 4D/E0 CD

E0 AA E0 4D/E0 CD E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 4D/E0 CD E0 AA [6]

E0 74/E0 F0 74

E0 F0 12 E0 74/E0 F0 74 E0 12[5]

E0 12 E0 74/E0 F0 74 E0 F0 12[6]

60/F0 60

6A/F0 6A

52/D2 [6]

53/D3 [6]

7E/FE

2B/AB

36/D6

70/F0 70 [6]

71/F0 71 [6]

6D/F0 6D

5D/F0 5D

61/F0 61

70/na [6]

71/na [6]

7B/F0 7B

53/F0 53

13/F0 13

Keyboard

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-15

Keyboard

Table C-2. (Continued)

Keyboard Scan Codes

Make/Break Codes (Hex)

Key

Pos.

Legend Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

Btn 6 [8]

Btn 7 [8]

Btn 1 [9]

Btn 2 [9]

Btn 3 [9]

Btn 4 [9]

Btn 5 [9]

Btn 6 [9]

Btn 7 [9]

Btn 8 [9]

110 (Win95) [7] E0 5B/E0 DB

E0 AA E0 5B/E0 DB E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 5B/E0 DB E0 AA [6]

E0 1F/E0 F0 1F

E0 F0 12 E0 1F/E0 F0 1F E0 12 [5]

E0 12 E0 1F/E0 F0 1F E0 F0 12 [6]

111 (Win95) [7] E0 5C/E0 DC

E0 AA E0 5C/E0 DC E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 5C/E0 DC E0 AA [6]

E0 2F/E0 F0 27

E0 F0 12 E0 27/E0 F0 27 E0 12 [5]

E0 12 E0 27/E0 F0 27 E0 F0 12 [6]

8B/F0 8B

8C/F0 8C

8D/F0 8D 112 (Win Apps)

[7]

E0 5D/E0 DD

E0 AA E0 5D/E0 DD E0 2A [4]

E0 2A E0 5D E0 DD E0 AA [6]

E0 2F/E0 F0 2F

E0 F0 12 E0 2F/E0 F0 2F E0 12 [5]

E0 12 E0 2F/E0 F0 2F E0 F0 12 [6

Btn 1 [8] E0 1E/E0 9E E0 1C/E0 F0 1C

Btn 2 [8]

Btn 3 [8]

Btn 4 [8]

Btn 5 [8]

E0 26/E0 A6

E0 25/E0 A5

E0 23/E0 A3

E0 21/E0 A1

E0 4B/E0 F0 4B

E0 42/E0 F0 42

E0 33/E0 F0 33

E0 2B/E0 F0 2B

95/F0 95

9C/F0 9C

9D/F0 9D

9A/F0 9A

99/F0 99

96/F0 96

97/F0 97

E0 12/E0 92

E0 32/E0 B2

E0 23/E0 A3

E0 1F/E0 9F

E0 1A/E0 9A

E0 1E/E0 9E

E0 13/E0 93

E0 14/E0 94

E0 24/E0 F0 24

E0 3A/E0 F0 3A

E0 33/E0 F0 33

E0 1B/E0 F0 1B

E0 54/E0 F0 54

E0 1C/E0 F0 1C

E0 2D/E0 F0 2D

E0 2C/E0 F0 2C

9A/F0 9A

80/F0 80

99/F0 99

95/F0 95

0C/F0 0C

9D/F0 9D

E0 15/E0 95

E0 1B/E0 9B

E0 35/E0 F0 35

E0 5B/E0 F0 5B

96/F0 96

97/F0 97

All codes assume Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys inactive unless otherwise noted.

NA = Not applicable

[1] Shift (left) key active.

[2] Ctrl key active.

[3] Alt key active.

[4] Left Shift key active. For active right Shift key, substitute AA/2A make/break codes for B6/36 codes.

[5] Left Shift key active. For active right Shift key, substitute F0 12/12 make/break codes for F0 59/59 codes.

[6] Num Lock key active.

[7] Windows keyboards only.

[8] 7-Button Easy Access keyboard.

[9] 8-Button Easy Access keyboard.

C-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Keyboard

C.3 Connectors

Two types of keyboard interfaces may be used in HP/Compaq systems: PS/2-type and USB-type.

System units that provide a PS/2 connector will ship with a PS/2-type keyboard but may also support simultaneous connection of a USB keyboard. Systems that do not provide a PS/2 interface will ship with a USB keyboard. For a detailed description of the PS/2 and USB interfaces refer to Chapter 5 “Input/Output” of this guide. The keyboard cable connectors and their pinouts are described in the following figures:

3

5

1 2

6

4

4

5

6

2

3

Pin

1

Function

Data

Not connected

Ground

+5 VDC

Clock

Not connected

Figure C-9. PS/2 Keyboard Cable Connector (Male)

4 3 2 1

2

3

Pin

1

4

Function

+5 VDC

Data (-)

Data (+)

Ground

Figure C-10. USB Keyboard Cable Connector (Male)

Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-17

Keyboard

C-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide

Index

Numerics

8259 Mode 4-12

A

AC97 Audio Controller 5-31

Advanced Digital Display (ADD2) 6-22 advanced, Computer Setup heading 7-13

APIC Mode 4-13 audible (beep) indications 4-24 audio codec 32

Audio Specifications 5-35

B

beep indications 4-24

BIOS upgrading 8-2 boot device order 8-3

Boot Error Codes 8-5

C

cable lock 4-22

CMOS 4-19

CMOS, clearing 4-9

Computer Setup 8-4 configuration memory 4-19

D

Direct Memory Access (DMA) 4-16

Diskette Drive Connector 4-11 diskette drive interface 4-7

F

file, Computer Setup heading 8-6

G

graphics subsystem 6-1

H

header pinouts 7-16

Technical Reference Guide

I

I/O map 4-26

IDE (PATA) Connector 4-3 integrated graphics controller (IGC). 6-2 interrupts, hardware 4-11 interrupts, PCI 4-13

K

keyboard interface 5-24

L

LED indications 4-24, 8-5

M

Memory 3-4 memory allocation 3-4 memory map 3-7 model numbering 1-2 mouse interface 5-24

N

Network Boot 8-4

Network Interface Controller 5-36

P

parallel interface 5-14

Parallel Interface Connector 5-17 password, Setup 4-22

PATA 4-1

PCI 2.3 4-2

PCI Express 4-6

Pentium 4 processor 3-2 power states 7-7

Processor Upgrading 3-3

R

Real-time clock (RTC) 4-19

ROM flashing 8-2

361834-002 Index–1

Index

S

SATA 4-1

SATA Connector 4-6

SDVO 6-2 security

Computer Setup heading 9 serial interface 5-12

Serial Interface Connector 5-12 serial number 1-3

Smart Cover Lock 2-23

Smart Cover Sensor 2-22

SMBIOS 8-19

SPD address map 3-6 specifications physical 2-32 storage, Computer Setup heading 7 system ID 8-17

T

Temperature Status 8-17

U

Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface 5-25 upgrading BIOS 8-2 upgrading graphics 6-5

USB 5-25

V

VGA connector 6-6

W

Web sites

Adobe Systems, Inc. 1-1

HP 1-1

Intel Corporation 1-1

Standard Microsystems Corporation 1-1

USB user group 1-1

Index–2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide